Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 187

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS

COURSE STRUCTURE AND

DETAILED SYLLABUS
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
for
Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech)

B. Tech. - Regular Four Year Degree Course


(For batches admitted from the academic year 2016 - 2017)
&
B. Tech. - Lateral Entry Scheme
(For batches admitted from the academic year 2017 - 2018)

MLR Institute of Technology


(Autonomous)
Laxman Reddy Avenue, Dundigal, Quthbullapur (M),
Hyderabad – 500043, Telangana State
www.mlrit.ac.in Email: director@mlrinstitutions.ac.in
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

FOREWORD

The autonomy is conferred on MLR Institute of Technology by UGC, based on its performance as
well as future commitment and competency to impart quality education. It is a mark of its ability to
function independently in accordance with the set norms of the monitoring bodies like UGC and
AICTE. It reflects the confidence of the UGC in the autonomous institution to uphold and maintain
standards it expects to deliver on its own behalf and thus awards degrees on behalf of the college.
Thus, an autonomous institution is given the freedom to have its own curriculum, examination
system and monitoring mechanism, independent of the affiliating University but under its
observance.

MLR Institute of Technology is proud to win the credence of all the above bodies monitoring the
quality in education and has gladly accepted the responsibility of sustaining, if not improving upon the
standards and ethics for which it has been striving for more than a decade in reaching its present
standing in the arena of contemporary technical education. As a follow up, statutory bodies like
Academic Council and Boards of Studies are constituted with the guidance of the Governing Body of
the College and recommendations of the JNTU Hyderabad to frame the regulations, course structure
and syllabi under autonomous status.

The autonomous regulations, course structure and syllabi have been prepared after prolonged and
detailed interaction with several expertise solicited from academics, industry and research, in
accordance with the vision and mission of the college in order to produce quality engineering
graduates to the society.

All the faculty, parents and students are requested to go through all the rules and regulations
carefully. Any clarifications, if needed, are to be sought, at appropriate time with principal of the
college, without presumptions, to avoid unwanted subsequent inconveniences and embarrassments.
The Cooperation of all the stake holders is sought for the successful implementation of the
autonomous system in the larger interests of the college and brighter prospects of engineering
graduates.

PRINCIPAL

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 2


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

B. Tech. - Regular Four Year Degree Program


(For batches admitted from the academic year 2016 - 17)
&
B. Tech. - Lateral Entry Scheme
(For batches admitted from the academic year 2017 - 18)

For pursuing four year under graduate Bachelor Degree Programme of study in Engineering (B.Tech)
offered by MLR Institute of Technology under Autonomous status is herein referred to as MLRIT
(Autonomous):

All the rules specified herein approved by the Academic Council will be in force and applicable to
students admitted from the Academic Year 2015-16 onwards. Any reference to ―Institute‖ or ―College‖
in these rules and regulations shall stand for M L R Institute of Technology (Autonomous).

All the rules and regulations, specified hereafter shall be read as a whole for the purpose of
interpretation as and when a doubt arises, the interpretation of the Chairman, Academic Council is
final. As per the requirements of statutory bodies, the Principal, M L R Institute of Technology shall be
the chairman Academic Council.

1. ADMISSION
1.1. Admission into first year of four year B. Tech. degree Program of study in Engineering:
1.1.1. Eligibility:
A candidate seeking admission into the first year of four year B. Tech. degree Program
should have:
(i) Passed either Intermediate Public Examination (I.P.E) conducted by the Board of
Intermediate Education, Telangana, with Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry as optional
subjects or any equivalent examination recognized by Board of Intermediate Education,
Telangana or a Diploma in Engineering in the relevant branch conducted by the Board of
Technical Education, Telangana or equivalent Diploma recognized by Board of Technical
Education for admission as per guidelines defined by the Regulatory bodies of Telangana
State Council for Higher Education (TSCHE) and AICTE.
(ii) Secured a rank in the EAMCET examination conducted by TSCHE for allotment of a
seat by the Convener, EAMCET, for admission.

1.1.2. Admission Procedure:


Admissions are made into the first year of four year B. Tech. Degree Program as per
the stipulations of the TSCHE.
(a) Category A seats are filled by the Convener, EAMCET.
(b) Category B seats are filled by the Management.

1.2. Admission into the second year of four year B. Tech. degree Program in Engineering
1.2.1 Eligibility:
A candidate seeking admission under lateral entry into the II year I Semester B. Tech. degree
Program should have passed the qualifying exam (B.Sc. Mathematics or Diploma in
concerned course) and based on the rank secured by the candidate at Engineering Common
Entrance Test ECET (FDH) in accordance with the instructions received from the Convener,
ECET and Government of Telangana.

1.2.2 Admission Procedure:


Admissions are made into the II year of four year B. Tech. degree Program through
Convener, ECET (FDH) against the sanctioned strength in each Program of study as lateral
entry students.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 3


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. PROGRAMS OFFERED
MLR Institute of Technology, an autonomous college affiliated to JNTUH, offers the
following B. Tech. Programs of study leading to the award of B. Tech. degree under the
autonomous scheme.
1) B.Tech.- Aeronautical Engineering
2) B.Tech. - Computer Science and Engineering
3) B.Tech. - Electronics and Communication Engineering
4) B.Tech. - Information Technology
5) B. Tech. - Mechanical Engineering

3. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMS


3.1 Normal Duration
3.1.1 B. Tech. degree program extends over a period of four academic years leading to the Degree
of Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) of the Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University
Hyderabad.
3.1.2 For students admitted under lateral entry scheme, B. Tech. degree program extends over a
period of three academic years leading to the Degree of Bachelor of Technology (B. Tech.) of
the Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University Hyderabad.

3.2 Maximum Duration


3.2.1 The maximum period within which a student must complete a full-time academic program is 8
years for B. Tech. If a student fails to complete the academic program within the maximum
duration as specified above, he will be required to withdraw from the program.
3.2.2 For students admitted under lateral entry scheme in B. Tech. degree program, the maximum
period within which a student must complete a full-time academic program is 6 years. If a
student fails to complete the academic program within the maximum duration as specified
above, he will be required to withdraw from the program.
3.2.3 The period is reckoned from the academic year in which the student is admitted first time into
the degree Program.

4. AWARD OF B.Tech. DEGREE


A student will be declared eligible for the award of the B. Tech. degree if he/she fulfils the
following academic regulations:
4.1 The candidate shall pursue a course of study for not less than four academic years and not
more than eight years.
4.2 The candidate shall register for 176 credits and secure 176 credits.

5. PROGRAMME STRUCTURE
5.1 UGC/AICTE specified Definitions/ Descriptions are adopted appropriately for various
terms and abbreviations used in these Academic Regulations/ Norms, which are listed
below.

Semester Scheme:
Each UGP is of 4 Academic Years (8 Semesters), each year divided into two semesters of 23
weeks (≥90 working days), each Semester having - ‗Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)‘ and
‗Semester End Examination (SEE)‘. Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) and Credit Based
Semester System (CBSS) as denoted by UGC, and Curriculum/Course Structure as
suggested by AICTE are followed.
5.1.2 The B.Tech. Programmes of MLR Institute of Technology are of semester pattern, with 8
Semesters constituting 4 Academic Years, each Academic Year having TWO Semesters
(First/Odd and Second/Even Semesters). Each Semester shall be of 23 Weeks duration
(inclusive of Examinations), with a minimum of 90 Instructional Days per Semester.
5.1.3 Credit Courses:

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 4


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

a) All Subjects/ Courses are to be registered by a student in a Semester to earn Credits.


Credits shall be assigned to each Subject/ Course in a L: T: P: C (Lecture Periods: Tutorial
Periods: Practical Periods : Credits) Structure, based on the following general pattern ..
• One Credit - for One hour/Week/Semester for Theory/Lecture (L) Courses; and
• One Credit - for Two hours/Week/Semester for Laboratory/Practical (P) Courses, Mini
Project...
Identifying Mandatory Courses like Technical seminars/Micro Project/EPICS/Certification
Courses, Computational Mathematics (FOSS), Study Tour, Guest Lecture, Tutorials, etc., will
not carry any Credits
b) Contact Hours: Every student has to register for a set of course (subject) in each
semester, with the total number of credits being limited by considering the permissible weekly
contact hours - typically equal to 33 hours per week or equal to 40 periods per week (i.e. 1
hour = 60 Minutes & 1 period = 50 Minutes); for this an average course load of 22 credits per
semester including Mandatory Non-Credit courses also in some semester.
5.1.4 Subject/ Course Classification:
All Subjects/ Courses offered for the UGP are broadly classified as: (a) Foundation Courses
(FnC), (b) Core Courses (CoC), and (c) Elective Courses (EℓC).
- Foundation Courses (FnC) are further categorized as: (i) H&S (Humanities and Social
Sciences), (ii) BS (Basic Sciences), and (iii) ES (Engineering Sciences);
- Core Courses (CoC) and Elective Courses (EℓC) are categorized as PS (Professional
Subjects), which are further subdivided as – (i) PC (Professional / Departmental Core)
Subjects, (ii) PE (Professional/ Departmental Electives), (iii) OE (Open Electives); and
(iv) Project Works (PW);
- Minor Courses (1 or 2 Credit Courses, belonging to HS/BS/ES/PC as per relevance); and
Mandatory Courses (MC - non-credit oriented).
5.1.5 Course Nomenclature:
The Curriculum Nomenclature or Course-Structure Grouping for the each of the UGP E&T
(B.Tech. Degree Programmes), is as listed below (along with AICTE specified % Range of
Total Credits).

Broad
S. Course Group/ Range of
Course Course Description
No. Classification Category Credits
BS – Basic Includes - Mathematics, Physics
1) 15%-20%
Sciences and Chemistry Subjects
ES - Engineering Includes fundamental engineering
2) Foundation 15%-20%
Courses Sciences subjects.
(FnC) HS – Humanities Includes subjects related to
3) and Social Humanities, Social Sciences and 5%-10%
Sciences Management.
PC – Includes core subjects related to
Core Courses
4) Professional the Parent Discipline/ Department/ 30%-40%
(CoC)
Core Branch of Engg.
PE – Includes Elective subjects related
5) Professional to the Parent Discipline / 10%-15%
Electives Department / Branch of Engg.
Elective
Elective subjects which include
Courses
inter-disciplinary subjects or
(EℓC) OE – Open
6) subjects in an area outside the 5%-10%
Electives
Parent Discipline/ Department /
Branch of Engg.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 5


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

B.Tech. Project or UG Project or


7) Project Work
UG Major Project.
Industrial
Industrial Training/ Internship/ UG
8) Training/ Mini-
Mini-Project/ Mini-Project.
Core Courses Project 10%-15%
Seminar / Colloquium based on
core contents related to Parent
9) Seminar
Discipline/ Department/ Branch of
Engg.
1 or 2 Credit Courses (subset of
10) Minor Courses Included
HS)
Mandatory
11) Mandatory Courses (non-credit) -
Courses (MC)
176
Total Credits for UGP (B. Tech.)Programme
(100%)

6. COURSE REGISTRATION
6.1 A ‗Faculty Advisor or Counsellor‘ shall be assigned to each student, who advises him/her
about the UGP, its Course Structure and Curriculum, Choice/Option for Subjects/Courses,
based on his/her competence, progress, pre-requisites and interest.
6.2 Academic Section of the College invites ‗Registration Forms‘ from students prior (before the
beginning of the Semester), ensuring ‗DATE and TIME Stamping‘. The Registration Requests
for any ‗CURRENT SEMESTER‘ shall be completed BEFORE the commencement of SEEs
(Semester End Examinations) of the ‗PRECEDING SEMESTER‘
A Student can apply for Registration, which includes approval from his faculty advisor, and
then should be submitted to the College Academic Section through the Head of Department
(a copy of the same being retained with Head of Department, Faculty Advisor and the
Student).
6.4 A Student may be permitted to Register for his/her Subjects/Course of CHOICE with a typical
total of 22 Credits per Semester (Minimum being 19C and Maximum being 25C, permitted
deviation being± 17%), based on his PROGRESS and SGPA/CGPA, and completion of the
‗PRE-REQUISITES‘ as indicated for various Subjects/Courses, in the Department Course
Structure and Syllabus contents.
6.5 Choice for ‗additional Subjects/Courses‘ to reach the Maximum Permissible Limit of 25
Credits (above the typical 22 Credit norm) must be clearly indicated, which needs the specific
approval and signature of the Faculty Advisor/Counsellor.
6.6 If the Student submits ambiguous choices or multiple options or erroneous (incorrect) entries
during Registration for the Subject(s)/Course(s) under a given/specified Course Group/
Category as listed in the Course Structure, only the first mentioned Subject/Course in that
Category will be taken into consideration.
6.7 Dropping of Subjects/Courses or changing of options may be permitted, ONLY AFTER
obtaining prior approval from the Faculty Advisor (subject to retaining a minimum of 19 C),
‗within 15 Days of Time‘ from the commencement of that Semester. Subject/Course Options
exercised through Registration are final and CAN NOT be changed, and CAN NOT be inter-
changed; further, alternate choices will also not be considered. However, if the Subject/
Course that has already been listed for Registration (by the Head of Department) in a
Semester could not be offered due to any unforeseen or unexpected reasons, then the
Student shall be allowed to have alternate choice - either for a new Subject (subject to
offering of such a Subject), or for another existing Subject (subject to availability of seats),
which may be considered. Such alternate arrangements will be made by the Head of
Department, with due notification and time-framed schedule, within the FIRST WEEK from
the commencement of Class-work for that Semester.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 6


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

7. SUBJECTS/ COURSES TO BE OFFERED


7.1 A Subject/Course may be offered to the Students, IF ONLY a Minimum of 1/3 of Students
register to the course.
7.2 More than ONE TEACHER may offer the SAME SUBJECT (Lab/Practical‘s may be included
with the corresponding Theory Subject in the same Semester) in any Semester. However,
selection choice for students will be based on - ‗CGPA Basis Criterion‘ (i.e., the first focus
shall be on early Registration in that Semester, and the second focus, if needed, will be on
CGPA of the student).
7.3 If more entries for Registration of a Subject come into picture, then the concerned Head of
the Department shall take necessary decision, whether to offer such a Subject/Course for
TWO (or multiple) SECTIONS or NOT .
7.4 OPEN ELECTIVES will be offered by a department to the students of other departments.

8. ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS
a. A student shall be eligible to appear for the End Semester Examinations, if he acquires a
minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the Subjects/Courses (excluding
Mandatory or Non-Credit Courses) for that Semester.
b. Condoning of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above, and below
75%) in each Semester may be granted by the College Academic Committee on genuine
and valid grounds, based on the student‘s representation with supporting evidence by
following the govt. rules in vogue.
c. A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condoning of shortage of attendance.
d. Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall in NO case be condoned.
e. A student will not be promoted to the next semester unless he/she satisfies the attendance
requirements of the current semester. The student may seek readmission for the semester
when offered next. He / She will not be allowed to register for the subjects of the semester
while he/she is in detention. A student detained due to shortage of attendance, will have to
repeat that semester when offered next.

9. ACADEMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PROMOTION / COMPLETION OF REGULAR B.TECH


PROGRAM COURSE STUDY
9.1 A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the Academic Requirements and earned the
Credits allotted to each Subject/Course, if he secures not less than 35% marks in the End
Semester Examination, and a minimum of 40% of marks in the sum total of the CIE
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End Examination) taken together; in
terms of Letter Grades, this implies securing P Grade or above in that Subject/Course.
9.2 A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the Academic Requirements and earned the
Credits allotted to - Industry oriented Mini-Project/Seminar, if he/she secures not less than
40% of the total marks (50 marks) to be awarded for each. The student would be treated as
failed, if he/she - (i) does not submit a report on his Industry oriented Mini-Project, or does not
make a presentation of the same before the Evaluation Committee as per the schedule, or (ii)
does not present the Seminar as required in the IV year I/II Semester, or (iii) secures less
than 40% of marks in Industry oriented Mini-Project/Seminar evaluations. He may reappear
once for each of the above evaluations, when they are scheduled again; if he fails in such
‗one reappearance‘ evaluation also, he has to reappear for the same in the next subsequent
Semester, as per the schedule.
9.3 A Student will not be promoted from I Year to II Year, unless he/she fulfils the Attendance
requirements.
9.4 A Student will not be promoted from II Year to III Year, unless he/she fulfils the Attendance
and Academic Requirements and (i) secures a total of 44 Credits out of 88 Credits up to II
Year II Semester from all the relevant regular and supplementary examinations, whether he
takes those examinations or not.
9.5 A Student will not be promoted from III Year to IV Year, unless he/she fulfils the Attendance
and Academic Requirements and (i) secures a total of 66 Credits out of 132 Credits up to

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 7


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

III Year II Semester, from all the relevant regular and supplementary examinations, whether
he takes those examinations or not.
9.6 After securing the necessary 176 Credits as specified for the successful completion of the
entire UGP, resulting in 176 Credits for UGP performance evaluation, i.e., the performance of
the Student in these 176 Credits shall alone be taken into account for the calculation of ‗the
final CGPA.
If a Student registers for some more ‗extra Subjects‘ (in the parent Department or other
Departments/Branches of Engg.) other than those listed Subjects totalling to 176 Credits as
specified in the Course Structure of his Department, the performances in those ‗extra
Subjects‘ (although evaluated and graded using the same procedure as that of the required
176 Credits) will not be taken into account while calculating the SGPA and CGPA. For such
‗extra Subjects‘ registered, % marks and Letter Grade alone will be indicated in the Grade
Card, as a performance measure, subject to completion of the Attendance and Academic
Requirements as stated in items 8 and 9.1-9.7.
9.7 Students who fail to earn minimum of 176 Credits as per the Course Structure, and as
indicated above, within 8 Academic Years from the Date of Commencement of their I Year
shall forfeit their seats in B.Tech Programme and their admissions shall stand cancelled.
When a Student is detained due to shortage of attendance/lack of credits in any Semester, he
may be re-admitted into that Semester, as and when offered. However the regulations at the
time of admissions hold good.

10. EVALUATION - DISTRIBUTION AND WEIGHTAGE OF MARKS


10.1 The performance of a student in each Semester shall be evaluated Subject-wise (irrespective
of Credits assigned) with a maximum of 100 marks for Theory. The B.Tech Project Work
(Major Project) will be evaluated for 200 Marks. These evaluations shall be based on 25%
CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and 75% SEE (Semester End Examination), and a
Letter Grade corresponding to the % marks obtained shall be given.
10.2 For all Theory Subjects/Courses as mentioned above, the distribution shall be 25 marks for
CIE, and 75 marks for the SEE.
10.3 a) For Theory Subjects (inclusive of Minor Courses), during the Semester, there shall be 2
mid-term examinations for 25 marks each. Each mid-term examination consists of one
objective paper for 10 marks, one subjective paper for 10 marks and assignment for 5
marks for each subject.
Objective paper is set for a total of 10 marks with 20 bits. Subjective Paper contains five
questions, 1 & 2, internal choice from each unit and each question consists of a & b sub-
questions. Question 3 & 4 with internal choice from unit-II and question 5 having a, b bits
with internal choice from first half part of unit-III for I-MID examinations. For II-MID 1 & 2
questions from unit-4, questions 3 & 4 from unit-5 and question no 5 from remaining half
part of unit-3.
b) The first mid-term examination shall be conducted for the first 50% of the syllabus, and the
second mid-term examination shall be conducted for the remaining 50% of the syllabus.
c) First Assignment should be submitted before the commencement of the first mid-term
examinations, and the Second Assignment should be submitted before the
commencement of the second mid-term examinations. The assignments shall be
specified/given by the concerned subject teacher.
d) If any candidate is absent or those who want to improve their internal marks for the regular
MID examinations are allowed to write any subject of a current semester mid-term
examination, a test will be conducted for him/her by the college after the payment of
prescribed fee.
10.4 For Practical Subjects, there shall be a Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) during the
Semester for 25 internal marks, and 50 marks are assigned for Lab/Practical End Semester
Examination (SEE). Out of the 25 marks for internals, day-to-day work in the laboratory shall
be evaluated for 15 marks; and for the remaining 10 marks - two internal practical tests (each
of 10 marks) shall be conducted by the concerned laboratory teacher and the average of the

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 8


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

two tests is taken into account. The SEE for Practical‘s shall be conducted at the end of the
Semester by Two Examiners appointed by the Chief controller of examinations in consultation
with the Head of the Department.
10.5 For the Subjects having Design and/or Drawing, (such as Engineering Graphics, Engineering
Drawing, Machine Drawing, Production Drawing Practice, and Estimation), the distribution
shall be 25 marks for CIE (10 marks for day-to-day work and 15 marks for internal tests) and
75 marks for SEE. There shall be two internal tests in a semester and the better of the two
shall be considered for the award of marks for internal tests.
10.6 Open Electives: Students can choose One Open Elective (OE-I) during V Semester, one
(OE-II) during VI Semester, and one (OE-III) in VII Semester, from the list of Open Electives
given. However, Students cannot opt for an Open Elective Subject offered by their own
(parent) Department, if it is already listed under any category of the Subjects offered by parent
Department in any Semester.
10.7 There shall be an industry-oriented Mini-Project, in collaboration with an industry of their
specialization, to be taken up during the vacation after III year II Semester (VII Semester)
examination. However, the mini-project and its report shall be evaluated in VII Semester. The
industry oriented mini-project shall be submitted in a report form and presented before the
committee. It shall be evaluated for 50 marks. The committee consists of an external
examiner, head of the department, the supervisor of the mini-project and a senior faculty
member of the department. There shall be no internal marks for industry-oriented mini-project.
10.8 There shall be a Seminar Presentation in VIII Semester. For the Seminar, the student shall
collect the information on a specialized topic, prepare a Technical Report and submit to the
Department at the time of Seminar Presentation. The Seminar Presentation (along with the
Technical Report) shall be evaluated for 50 marks for internal examinations. There shall be no
SEE for seminar.
10.9 There shall be a Comprehensive Viva & Test in VI & VIII Semester and will be conducted SEE
by a committee consisting of One External Examiner, Head of the Department and two Senior
faculty members of the Department. The comprehensive viva intended to assess the student‘s
understanding of the subjects he/she studied during the B.Tech. course of study. The
Comprehensive Viva-Voce & Test is evaluated for 50 marks by the committee. There shall be
no CIE for Comprehensive Viva.
10.10 Each Student shall start the Project Work during the VII Semester, as per the instructions of
the Project Guide/Project Supervisor assigned by the Head of Department. Out of total 200
marks allotted for the Project Work 50 marks shall be for CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation
and 150 marks for the SEE (End Semester Viva-voce Examination).
10.11 In VIII semester a mid-course review is conducted by Head of the Department and the project
supervisor 25 marks based on the student‘s progress. On completion of the project the
second evaluation is conducted for award of internal marks for another 25 marks before the
report is submitted making the total internal marks 50. The end semester examination shall be
based on the report submitted and a viva-voce exam for 150 marks by committee comprising
of the Head of the Department, project supervisor and an external examiner. A minimum of
40% of maximum marks shall be obtained to earn the corresponding credits.
10.12. End semester examination:
a) Question paper contains 2 Parts (Part-A and Part-B) having the questions distributed
equally among all units.
b) The distribution of marks for PART-A and PART-B will be 25 marks & 50 marks
respectively for UG programs Pattern of the question paper is as follows:

PART–A
Consists of two questions which are compulsory. The first question consists of five sub-
questions one from each unit and carry 3 marks each. Second question consists of five sub-
questions one from each unit and carry 2 marks each.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 9


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART-B
Consists of 5 questions carrying 10 marks each. Each of these questions is from one unit and
may contain sub questions. Each question there will be an ―either‖ ―or‖ choice (that means
there will be two questions from each unit and the student should answer any one question).
10.13 For Mandatory Non-Credit Courses offered like Technical Seminar, Micro Project, EPICS,
Certification, Computational Mathematics in a Semester, after securing ≥ 65% attendance and
he secure not less than 35% marks in the SEE, and a minimum of 40% of marks in the sum
total of the CIE and SEE taken together in such a course, then the student is PASS and will
be qualified for the award of the degree. No marks or Letter Grade shall be allotted for these
activities.However, for non credit courses ‗Satisfactory’ or ―Unsatisfactory’ shall be
indicated instead of the letter grade and this will not be counted for the computation of
SGPA/CGPA.

11. AWARD OF DEGREE


After a student has satisfied the requirement prescribed for the completion of the Program
and is eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree he shall be placed in one of the following four
classes Shown in Table.

Table: Declaration of Class based on CGPA (Cumulative Grade Point Average)

Class Awarded Grade to be Secured

First Class with Distinction ≥ 7.75 CGPA From the aggregate marks
First Class ≥ 6.75 to < 7.75 CGPA secured from 176 Credits for
Regular Students and 132
Second Class ≥ 5.75 to < 6.75 CGPA Credits for Lateral Entry
Students.
Pass Class ≥ 5.00 to < 5.75 CGPA

FAIL CGPA < 5


a) First Class with Distinction will be awarded to those students who clear all the subjects in
single attempt during his/her regular course of study.
b) Improvement of Grades and Completion of the Course
i) Candidates who have passed in a theory paper in a semester are allowed to appear
for improvement only once in the next immediate instant exam for only one
subject of his choice.
ii) If candidate improves his/her grade, then his/her improved grade will be taken into
consideration for the award of GPA only.
iii) The improved grade shall not be higher than A+. Such improved grade will not
be counted for the award of prizes/medals, Rank and Distinction.
iv) If the candidate does not show improvement in the grade, his/her previous grade will
be taken into consideration.
v) Candidates will not be allowed to improve grade in the Comprehensive viva,
Laboratory, Seminars and Project Work. There is no improvement examinations in
-VIII semester.

12. LETTER GRADE AND GRADE POINT


12.1 Marks will be awarded to indicate the performance of each student in each Theory Subject, or
Lab/Practical‘s, or Seminar, or Project, or Mini-Project, Minor Course etc., based on the
%marks obtained in CIE+SEE (Continuous Internal Evaluation + Semester End Examination,
both taken together), and a corresponding Letter Grade shall be given.
12.2 As a measure of the student‘s performance, a 10-point Absolute Grading System using the
following Letter Grades (UGC Guidelines) and corresponding percentage of marks shall be
followed...

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 10


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

% of Marks Secured Letter Grade Grade Points


(Class Intervals) (UGC Guidelines)
80% and above O
10
( ≥ 80% , ≤ 100% ) (Outstanding)
+
Below 80% but not less than 70% A
9
( ≥ 70% , < 80% ) (Excellent)
Below 70% but not less than 60% A
8
( ≥ 60% , < 70% ) (Very Good)
+
Below 60% but not less than 55% B
7
( ≥ 55% , < 60% ) (Good)
Below 55% but not less than 50% B
6
( ≥ 50% , < 55% ) (above Average)
Below 50% but not less than 45% C
5
( ≥ 45% , < 50% ) (Average)
Below 45% but not less than 40% P
4
( ≥ 40% , < 45% ) (Pass)
Below 40% F
0
( < 40% ) (FAIL)

12.3 A student obtaining F Grade in any Subject shall be considered ‗failed‘ and will be required to
reappear as ‗Supplementary Candidate‘ in the End Semester Examination (SEE), as and
when offered. In such cases, his Internal Marks (CIE Marks) in those Subject(s) will remain
same as those he obtained earlier.
12.4 A Letter Grade does not imply any specific % of Marks.
12.5 In general, a student shall not be permitted to repeat any Subject/Course (s) only for the sake
of ‗Grade Improvement‘ or ‗SGPA/CGPA Improvement‘. However, he has to repeat all the
Subjects/Courses pertaining to that Semester, when he is detained.
12.6 A student earns Grade Point (GP) in each Subject/Course, on the basis of the Letter Grade
obtained by him in that Subject/Course (excluding Mandatory non-credit Courses). Then the
corresponding ‗Credit Points‘ (CP) are computed by multiplying the Grade Point with Credits
for that particular Subject/Course.
Credit Points (CP) = Grade Point (GP) x Credits …. For a Course
12.7 The Student passes the Subject/Course only when he gets GP ≥ 4 (P Grade or above).
12.8 The Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) is calculated by dividing the Sum of Credit Points
(ΣCP) secured from ALL Subjects/Courses registered in a Semester, by the Total Number of
Credits registered during that Semester. SGPA is rounded off to TWO Decimal Places. SGPA
is thus computed as
SGPA = { }/{ } …. For each Semester,
where ‗i‘ is the Subject indicator index (takes into account all Subjects in a Semester), ‗N‘ is
the no. of Subjects ‗REGISTERED‘ for the Semester (as specifically required and listed under
the Course Structure of the parent Department), is the no. of Credits allotted to that ix
Subject, and represents the Grade Points (GP) corresponding to the Letter Grade awarded
for that i Subject.
12.9 The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is a measure of the overall cumulative
performance of a student over all Semesters considered for registration. The CGPA is the
ratio of the Total Credit Points secured by a student in ALL registered Courses in ALL
Semesters, and the Total Number of Credits registered in ALL the Semesters. CGPA is
rounded off to TWO Decimal Places. CGPA is thus computed from the I Year Second
Semester onwards, at the end of each Semester, as per the formula
CGPA = { }/{ } … for all S Semesters registered
(i.e., up to and inclusive of S Semesters, S ≥ 2),

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 11


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

where ‗M‘ is the TOTAL no. of Subjects (as specifically required and listed under the Course
st
Structure of the parent Department) the Student has ‗REGISTERED‘ from the 1 Semester
onwards up to and inclusive of the Semester S (obviously M > N ), ‗j‘ is the Subject indicator
index (takes into account all Subjects from 1 to S Semesters), is the no. of Credits allotted
to the jth Subject, and represents the Grade Points (GP) corresponding to the Letter Grade
awarded for that jth Subject. After registration and completion of I Year I Semester however,
the SGPA of that Semester itself may be taken as the CGPA, as there are no cumulative
effects.
12.10 For Merit Ranking or Comparison Purposes or any other listing, ONLY the ‗ROUNDED OFF‘
values of the CGPAs will be used.
12.11 For Calculations listed in Item 12.6–12.10, performance in failed Subjects/Courses (securing F
Grade) will also be taken into account, and the Credits of such Subjects/Courses will also be
included in the multiplications and summations. However, Mandatory Courses will not be
taken into consideration.

13. DECLARATION OF RESULTS


a. Computation of SGPA and CGPA are done using the procedure listed in 12.6– 2.10.
b. For Final % of Marks equivalent to the computed final CGPA, the following formula may
be used …
% of Marks = (final CGPA – 0.5) x 10
14. WITH HOLDING OF RESULTS
If the student has not paid fees to College at any stage, or has pending dues against his
name due to any reason what so ever, or if any case of indiscipline is pending against him,
the result of the student may be withheld, and he will not be allowed to go into the next higher
Semester. The Award or issue of the Degree may also be withheld in such cases.

15. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS


Supplementary examinations will be conducted immediately after the declaration of the
regular examinations results for those who absent or appeared and failed in regular
examinations. Such candidates writing supplementary examinations may have to write more
than one examination per day.

16 TRANSCRIPTS
After successful completion of prerequisite credits for the award of degree a Transcript
containing performance of all academic years will be issued as a final record. Duplicate
transcripts will also be issued if required after the payment of requisite fee and also as per
norms in vogue.

17 RULES OF DISCIPLINE
17.1 Any attempt by any student to influence the teachers, Examiners, faculty and staff of controller
of Examination for undue favours in the exams, and bribing them either for marks or
attendance will be treated as malpractice cases and the student can be debarred from the
college.
17.2 When the student absents himself, he is treated as to have appeared and obtained zero marks
in that subject(s) and grading is done accordingly.
17.3 When the performance of the student in any subject(s) is cancelled as a punishment for
indiscipline, he is awarded zero marks in that subject(s).
17.4 When the student‘s answer book is confiscated for any kind of attempted or suspected
malpractice the decision of the Examiner is final.

18. MALPRACTICE PREVENTION COMMITTEE


A malpractice prevention committee shall be constituted to examine and punish the students
who does malpractice / behaves indiscipline in examinations. The committee shall consist of:

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 12


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

a) Controller of examinations - Chairman


b) Addl. Controller of examinations.- Member Convenor
c) Subject expert - member
d) Head of the department of which the student belongs to. - Member
e) The invigilator concerned - member
The committee shall conduct the meeting after taking explanation of the student and
punishment will be awarded by following the malpractice rules meticulously.
Any action on the part of candidate at the examination like trying to get undue advantage in
the performance at examinations or trying to help another, or derive the same through unfair
means is punishable according to the provisions contained hereunder. The involvement of the
Staff who are in charge of conducting examinations, valuing examination papers and
preparing / keeping records of documents relating to the examinations, in such acts (inclusive
of providing incorrect or misleading information) that infringe upon the course of natural justice
to one and all concerned at the examination shall be viewed seriously and will be
recommended for appropriate punishment after thorough enquiry.

19. TRANSITORY REGULATIONS


Student who has discontinued for any reason, or has been detained for want of attendance or
lack of required credits as specified, or who has failed after having undergone the Degree
Programme, may be considered eligible for readmission to the same Subjects/Courses (or
equivalent Subjects/Courses, as the case may be), and same Professional Electives/Open
Electives (or from set/category of Electives or equivalents suggested, as the case may be) as
and when they are offered (within the time-frame of 8 years from the Date of Commencement
of his I Year I Semester).

20. STUDENT TRANSFERS


There shall be no Branch transfers after the completion of Admission Process.

21. GRADUATION DAY


The College shall have its own Annual Graduation Day for the award of Degrees issued by
the University.

22. AWARD OF MEDALS


Institute will award Medals to the outstanding students who complete the entire course in the
first attempt within the stipulated time.

23. SCOPE
i) Where the words ―he‖, ―him‖, ―his‖, occur in the write-up of regulations, they include ―she‖,
―her‖.
ii) Where the words ―Subject‖ or ―Subjects‖, occur in these regulations, they also imply
―Course‖ or ―Courses‖.
iii) The Academic Regulations should be read as a whole, for the purpose of any
interpretation.
iv) In case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of
the Chairman of the Academic Council is final.
The Academic Council may change or amend the Academic Regulations, Course
Structure or Syllabi at any time, and the changes or amendments made shall be
applicable to all Students with effect from the dates notified by the Academic Council
Authorities.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 13


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Academic Regulations for B. Tech. (Lateral Entry Scheme)


(Effective for the students getting admitted into II year from the Academic Year 2016-2017 on wards)

1. The Students have to acquire 132 credits from II to IV year of B.Tech Program (Regular) for
the award of the degree.

2. Students, who fail to fulfil the requirement for the award of the degree in 6 consecutive
academic years from the year of admission, shall forfeit their seat.

3. The same attendance regulations are to be adopted as that of B. Tech. (Regular).

4. Promotion Rule:
The student shall be promoted from third year to fourth year only if he fulfils the academic
requirements of 44 out of 88 credits from all the exams conducted upto and including III year
II semester regular examinations, whether the candidate takes the examinations or not.

5. Award of Class:
After the student has satisfied the requirements prescribed for the completion of the program
and is eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree he shall be placed in one of the following four
classes: The marks obtained in the best 132 credits will be considered for the calculation of
percentage and award of class shall be shown separately.

6. All other regulations as applicable for B. Tech. Four-year degree course (Regular) will hold
good for B.Tech (Lateral Entry Scheme).

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 14


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MALPRACTICES RULES - DISCIPLINARY ACTIONFOR /IMPROPER CONDUCT IN


EXAMINATIONS

S.
Nature of Malpractices / Improper Conduct Punishment
No
Possesses or keeps accessible in
examination hall, any paper, note book,
programmable calculators, Cell phones,
pager, palm computers or any other form of
material concerned with or related to the Expulsion from the examination hall and
1 (a) subject of the examination (theory or cancellation of the performance in that subject
practical) in which he is appearing but has not only.
made use of (material shall include any marks
on the body of the candidate which can be
used as an aid in the subject of the
examination)
Gives assistance or guidance or receives it Expulsion from the examination hall and
from any other candidate orally or by any cancellation of the performance in that subject
(b) other body language methods or only of all the candidates involved. In case of
communicates through cell phones with any an outsider, he will be handed over to the
candidate or persons in or outside the exam police and a case is registered against him.
hall in respect of any matter.
Expulsion from the examination hall and
cancellation of the performance in that subject
Has copied in the examination hall from any and all other subjects the candidate has
paper, book, programmable calculators, palm already appeared including practical
computers or any other form of material examinations and project work and shall not
2
relevant to the subject of the examination be permitted to appear for the remaining
(theory or practical) in which the candidate is examinations of the subjects of that
appearing. Semester/year. The Hall Ticket of the
candidate is to be cancelled and sent to the
Principal.
The candidate who has impersonated shall be
expelled from examination hall. The candidate
is also debarred and forfeits the seat. The
performance of the original candidate who has
been impersonated, shall be cancelled in all
the subjects of the examination (including
practical‘s and project work) already appeared
and shall not be allowed to appear for
Impersonates any other candidate in examinations of the remaining subjects of that
3
connection with the examination. semester/year. The candidate is also
debarred for two consecutive semesters from
class work and all examinations. The
continuation of the course by the candidate is
subject to the academic regulations in
connection with forfeiture of seat. If the
imposter is an outsider, he will be handed
over to the police and a case is registered
against him.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 15


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Expulsion from the examination hall and


cancellation of performance in that subject
and all the other subjects the candidate has
already appeared including practical
Smuggles in the Answer book or additional examinations and project work and shall not
sheet or takes out or arranges to send out the be permitted for the remaining examinations
4 question paper during the examination or of the subjects of that semester/year. The
answer book or additional sheet, during or candidate is also debarred for two
after the examination. consecutive semesters from class work and
all examinations. The continuation of the
course by the candidate is subject to the
academic regulations in connection with
forfeiture of seat.
Uses objectionable, abusive or offensive
language in the answer paper or in letters to Cancellation of the performance in that
5
the examiners or writes to the examiner subject.
requesting him to award pass marks.
Refuses to obey the orders of the Addl.
Controller of examinations / any officer on
duty or misbehaves or creates disturbance of
any kind in and around the examination hall
or organizes a walk out or instigates others to
walk out, or threatens the addl. Controller of In case of students of the college, they shall
examinations or any person on duty in or be expelled from examination halls and
outside the examination hall of any injury to cancellation of their performance in that
his person or to any of his relations whether subject and all other subjects the candidate(s)
by words, either spoken or written or by signs has (have) already appeared and shall not be
or by visible representation, assaults the addl. permitted to appear for the remaining
6
Controller of examinations, or any person on examinations of the subjects of that
duty in or outside the examination hall or any semester/year. The candidates also are
of his relations, or indulges in any other act of debarred and forfeit their seats. In case of
misconduct or mischief which result in outsiders, they will be handed over to the
damage to or destruction of property in the police and a police case is registered against
examination hall or any part of the College them.
campus or engages in any other act which in
the opinion of the officer on duty amounts to
use of unfair means or misconduct or has the
tendency to disrupt the orderly conduct of the
examination.
Expulsion from the examination hall and
cancellation of performance in that subject
and all the other subjects the candidate has
already appeared including practical
examinations and project work and shall not
Leaves the exam hall taking away answer be permitted for the remaining examinations
7 script or intentionally tears of the script or any of the subjects of that semester/year. The
part thereof inside or outside the examination candidate is also debarred for two
hall. consecutive semesters from class work and
all examinations. The continuation of the
course by the candidate is subject to the
academic regulations in connection with
forfeiture of seat.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 16


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Expulsion from the examination hall and


cancellation of the performance in that subject
and all other subjects the candidate has
already appeared including practical
8 Possess any lethal weapon or firearm in the examinations and project work and shall not
examination hall. be permitted for the remaining examinations
of the subjects of that semester/year. The
candidate is also debarred and forfeits the
seat.
Student of the colleges expulsion from the
examination hall and cancellation of the
performance in that subject and all other
subjects the candidate has already appeared
If student of the college, who is not a including practical examinations and project
candidate for the particular examination or work and shall not be permitted for the
9 any person not connected with the college remaining examinations of the subjects of that
indulges in any malpractice or improper semester/year. The candidate is also
conduct mentioned in clause 6 to 8. debarred and forfeits the seat. Person(s) who
do not belong to the College will be handed
over to police and, a police case will be
registered against them.
Expulsion from the examination hall and
cancellation of the performance in that subject
and all other subjects the candidate has
10 Comes in a drunken condition to the already appeared including practical
examination hall. examinations and project work and shall not
be permitted for the remaining examinations
of the subjects of that semester/year.
Cancellation of the performance in that
Copying detected on the basis of internal subject and all other subjects the candidate
11 evidence, such as, during valuation or during has appeared including practical examinations
special scrutiny. and project work of that semester/year
examinations.
If any malpractice is detected which is not
covered in the above clauses 1 to 11 shall be
12
reported to the principal for further action to
award suitable punishment.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 17


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE STRUCTURE

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 18


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

B.Tech.-COURSE STRUCTURE - MLR-16

I B.Tech.- I SEMESTER
Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course
Course Title Week Credits Maximum Marks
Code Area
L T P CIE SEE Total
Differential Equations
A2HS01 and Applications BS 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2HS11 Technical English HS 3 - - 3 25 75 100
A2HS06 Applied Physics-I BS 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2HS09 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2CS01 Computer Programming ES 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
English Communication
A2HS12 HS - - 3 2 25 50 75
Skills Lab
Computer Programming
A2CS02 ES - - 3 2 25 50 75
using C Lab
A2ME03 Engineering Graphics ES 1 1 3 3 25 75 100
Total 16 3 9 22 200 550 750
Mandatory Course (Non-Credit)
Technical Seminar-I
A2HS19 (Micro Project MC - - 2 - 25 50 75
/EPICS/Certification)

I B.Tech.-II SEMESTER
Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course
Course Title Week Credits Maximum Marks
Code Area L T P CIE SEE Total
Linear Algebra and
A2HS03 Integral Transforms BS 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2HS07 Applied Physics-II BS 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Electrical & Electronics
A2EC02
Engineering ES 3 - - 3 25 75 100
Computational
A2HS02 Methods and Integral BS 3 - - 3 25 75 100
calculus
Engineering
A2ME01 Mechanics ES 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Applied Physics &
A2HS10 Engineering Chemistry BS - - 3 2 25 50 75
Lab
A2ME04 Advanced Engineering ES 1 1 3 3 25 75 100
Graphics
A2ME07 Workshop Practices ES - - 3 2 25 50 75
Total 16 5 9 22 200 550 750
Mandatory Course (Non-Credit)
Technical Seminar &
A2HS18 Computational MC - - 2 - 25 50 75
Mathematics(FOSS)

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 19


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

II B.Tech.- I SEMESTER
Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course Week Maximum Marks
Code Course Title Area Credits Internal External
L T P (CIE) (SEE) Total
Probability Theory &
A2HS04 BS 3 - - 3 25 75 100
Complex Analysis
A2ME08 Mechanics of Solids ES 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Fluid Mechanics &
A2ME09
Hydraulic Machinery ES 3 1 - 3 25 75 100

A2ME10 Thermodynamics ES 3 1 - 3 25 75 100


Metallurgy and
A2ME11 ES 3 - - 3 25 75 100
Material Science
Machine Drawing
A2ME12 PC 1 1 4 3 25 50 75
Lab
Electrical &
A2EC04 Electronics Engg. ES - - 3 2 25 50 75
Lab
Mechanics of Solids
A2ME13 ES - - 3 2 25 50 75
Lab
Total 16 4 10 22 200 525 725
Mandatory Course (Non-Credit)
A2HS17 Gender Sensitization MC - - 3 - 25 50 75

II B.Tech.- II SEMESTER
Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course Week Maximum Marks
Code Course Title Area Credits Internal External
L T P Total
(CIE) (SEE)
Managerial Economics
A2HS14 BS 3 - - 3 25 75 100
and Financial Analysis
Design of Machine
A2ME14 PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Members-I
A2ME15 Thermal Engineering-I PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2ME16 Production Technology PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Kinematics of
A2ME17 Machinery PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Production Technology
A2ME18 Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75
Metallurgy & Material
A2ME19 Science Lab ES 1 - 3 3 25 50 75
Fluid Mechanics and
A2ME20 Hydraulic Machinery ES - - 3 2 25 50 75
Lab
Total 16 4 9 22 200 525 725
Mandatory Course (Non-Credit)
A2HS16 Environmental Studies MC 3 - - - 25 50 75

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 20


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

III B.Tech.- I SEMESTER


Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course Week Maximum Marks
Code Course Title Area Credits Internal External
L T P (CIE) (SEE) Total
A2ME21 Dynamics of Machinery PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2ME22 Machine Tools PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2ME23 Thermal Engineering - II PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2ME24 Design of Machine PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Members - II
OPEN ELECTIVE – I OE 3 - - 3 25 75 100
A2ME28 Thermal Engineering PC 1 - 3 3 25 50 75
Lab
A2ME29 Machine Tools Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75
A2ME30 Dynamics of Machinery PC - - 3 2 25 50 75
Lab
Total 16 4 9 22 200 525 725
Mandatory Course (Non-Credit)
Technical Seminar-II
A2ME71 (Micro Project /EPICS MC - - 2 - 25 50 75
/Certification/MOOCS)

III B.Tech.- II SEMESTER


Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course Week Maximum Marks
Code Course Title Area Credits Internal External
L T P (CIE) (SEE) Total
A2ME31 Engineering Metrology PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2ME32 Heat Transfer PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2ME38 Composite Materials PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
OPEN ELECTIVE-II OE 3 - - 3 25 75 100
PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE - I PE 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A2ME41 Heat Transfer Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75

A2ME42 Metrology Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75


Advanced English
A2HS13 Communication Skills HS - - 3 2 25 50 75
Lab
A2ME68 Comprehensive Viva-I CC - - - 1 - 50 50
Total 15 4 9 22 200 575 775

rd nd
Industry oriented miniproject is carried out during summer vacation between III Year II Sem and
th st th st
IV Year I Sem,Evaluation is done in IV Year I Sem.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 21


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

IV B.Tech.- I SEMESTER
Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Week Maximum Marks
Course Course Title Credits
Area Internal External
Code L T P (CIE) (SEE) Total

A2ME43 CAD/CAM PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100


Instrumentation and
A2ME44
Control Systems PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100

A2AE26 Finite Element Method PC 3 1 3 25 75 100


OPEN ELECTIVE-III OE 3 - - 3 25 75 100
PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE - II PE 3 - - 3 25 75 100

A2ME53 CAD/CAM Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75


Production Drawing
Practice &
A2ME54 Instrumentation and PC - 1 3 2 25 50 75
Control Systems Lab
Composite Materials
A2ME55
Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75
Industry Oriented Mini
A2ME56
Project CC - - 3 1 - 50 50

Total 15 4 12 22 200 575 775

IV B.Tech.- II SEMESTER
Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course Week Maximum Marks
Code Course Title Area Credits Internal External
L T P (CIE) (SEE) Total
Automobile
A2ME38 Engineering PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE – III PE 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
PROFESSIONAL
ELECTIVE – IV PE 3 1 - 3 25 75 100

A2ME66 Comprehensive Viva-II CC - - - 1 - 50 50


A2ME69 Project CC - - 14 10 50 150 200
A2ME67 Seminar CC - - 3 2 50 - 50
Total 9 3 17 22 175 425 600

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 22


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OPEN ELECTIVES
OE1 OE2 OE3
Fundamentals of Fundamentals of Introduction to
A2ME25 A2ME34 A2ME46
Mechatronics Operation Research Material Handling
Basics of Economics for Non-Conventional
A2ME26 A2ME35 A2ME47
Thermodynamics Engineers Energy Sources
Fundamentals of Aspects of Heat
A2ME27
Engineering Materials A2ME36 Basics of Robotics A2ME48 & Mass Transfer
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES
PE1 PE2

A2ME37 Operations Research A2ME49 Production Planning & Control


A2ME57 Power Plant Engineering A2ME50 Refrigeration & Air-conditioning
A2ME39 Mechatronics A2ME51 Renewal Energy Sources
A2ME40 Product Lifecycle Management A2ME52 Unconventional Machining Processes
PE3 PE4
A2ME58 Industrial Robotics A2ME62 Automation in Manufacturing
Quality Management & Quality Flexible Manufacturing Systems
A2ME59 Systems A2ME63

A2ME60 Mechanical Vibrations A2ME64 Nano Technology

A2ME61 Machine Tool Design A2ME65 Additive Manufacturing

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 23


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

I B.TECH I SEMESTER
SYLLABUS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 24


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DIFFERENTAIL EQUATIONS AND APPLICATIONS

I B.Tech.- I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS01 3 1 - 3

Course Overview:
This course develops the theory of differential equations and indicating its applications. This
course deals with more advanced Engineering Mathematics topics which provide students with
the relevant mathematical tools required in the analysis of problems in engineering and
scientific professions. Topics include the differential equations of first order and their
applications, higher order linear differential equations and their applications, functions of single
variable and their applications, partial differential equations, Fourier series. The mathematical
skills derived from this course form a necessary base to analytical and design concepts
encountered in the program.

Prerequisite(s): Knowledge of differentiation and integration.


Course Objectives:

I. Get the knowledge of differential equations in mathematical modeling.


II. To explain higher order differential equations and their applications in engineering
problem solving.
III. The modeling to mathematical problem and thereby finds a solution
using mathematical concepts.
IV. To develop alternative ways to solve a problem and systematic approach of a solution
in real life.
V. Know the basic properties of standard partial differential equations to solve
engineering problems
VI. To gain experience of doing independent study and research.

Course Outcomes:

Up on successful completion of this course, student will be able to:

1. Specify standard methods for solving differential equations and their applications in
geometrical and physical problems.
2. Identify different types of higher order differential equations and their applications in
engineering problem solving.
3. Apply partial derivatives to study maxima and minima of functions of two variables
4. Apply partial differential equations to solve the linear and nonlinear partial
differential equations.
5.Apply partial differential equations to solve engineering problems.
6.Participate and succeed in competitive examinations like GATE, GRE.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 25


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF FIRST ORDER AND THEIR APPLICATIONS: Exact
equations and equations reducible to exact form- Application of first order differential
equations- Orthogonal trajectories- Newton‘s law of cooling – Law of natural growth and
decay.
UNIT – II
HIGHER ORDER LINEAR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS:
Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients, Non-
ax ax n
Homogeneous term of the type Q(x) = e , sinax, cosax, e v(x), x V(x) –Equations
reducible to linear equations with constant coefficients- Cauchy‘s homogeneous linear
equation – Legendre‘s linear equation – Method of variation of parameters –Applications to
Electrical Circuits and Simple harmonic motion.

UNIT-III
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIATION: Introduction – Limit – Continuity – Partial derivatives –
Partial derivatives of Higher orders – Homogenous function – Euler’s theorem on
Homogenous function – Total Differential Coefficients.

FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES: Jacobian – Functional dependence – Maxima


and Minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined
multipliers.

UNIT – IV
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS: Formation of partial differential equation by
elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions- Solutions of first order linear
(Lagrange) equation and nonlinear (standard type) equations – Equations reducible to
standard forms.

UNIT – V
FOURIER SERIES: Determination of Fourier coefficients-Fourier series in an arbitrary
interval-Fourier series of even and odd functions-Half range Fourier sine and cosine
expansions.

TEXT BOOKS
1. A fist course in differential equations with modeling application by dennis G.Zill,
Cengage Learning.
2. Higher Engineering Mathematics by Dr.B.S.Grewal, Khanna publishers
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by R K Jain & S R K Iyengar, Narosa Publishers
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by E. Kreyszig, John Wiley & Sons Publisher.
2. Engineering Mathematics by N.P.Balil, Lakshmi Publications.
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Michael Greenberg, pearson Education.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 26


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

TECHNICAL ENGLISH

I B.Tech.- I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS11 3 - - 3
Course Overview:
The basic idea behind offering this certificate course as a subject at the undergraduate level is
to acquaint students with a language held by common consent to be the most popular language and
predictably the most used in countries across the globe. The lessons included as part of syllabus, aim
to take the nuances of English to students as it reveals its strengths and complexity when used to
perform a variety of functions. For prospective engineers, nothing could be more useful or productive
than being able to reach out to the world of technology and business through grammar, vocabulary,
collocations besides letter-writing, advertisements, posters, technical presentations, report writing,
seminars etc. Teachers of English have a special role to play in polishing and honing the linguistic
skills of engineers in the making, through a variety of tasks, assignments and role plays that bring
alive the language in the classroom and prepare students for the world of work. The mission of taking
the language to students is achieved from teaching texts that are rich in vocabulary and grammar,
texts that teach learners how to contextualize, situate meaning amidst ambiguity and learn the art of
being able to persuade, compel, cajole, complain, narrate, describe etc. through recourse to a range
of devices- linguistic and literary- on offer. Besides, the course has in mind the task of preparing
students to fulfill basic functions with language that come their way during the course of study, such
as being able to compose email effectively in precise writing, essay writing , prepare technical
reports/papers, write effective business ,formal and job application letters etc.
Course objectives:

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

• talk about business subjects


• understand charts and graphs
• Write short business emails, reports and make notes on simple topics.
• Follow short telephone conversations.
• Follow simple presentations/demonstrations.
• Exchange straightforward opinions and make requests.
• offer advice and state routine requirements

Course Outcomes:
Up on successful completion of this course, student will be able to:
1. Acquire the use of grammar effectively (vocabulary and so on) through extensive coursework
on writing reports and reading comprehensions, articles, essays, general discussion etc.
2. To bring an awareness among the future entrepreneurs about the risks in the running
enterprises.
3. To inculcate profound knowledge through BEC for practical, everyday use in business.
4. Assess the skills of writing business letters in various situations and generate skills of writing
business letters, essays and memos.
5. Categorize the various structures of reports and compose to use them in the professional
scenario.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 27


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT – I

Grammar : Introduction to Grammar, Parts of Speech


Vocabulary : Technical Vocabulary
Listening : Listening for specific information in short, long conversations and monologues.
Speaking : Conversation between students in pairs and groups, general interaction and
social language.
Reading : Reading for the Main idea, finding specific information, reading for detail,
Reading and transferring information, Understanding the attitudes.
Writing : Writing short messages that include certain information.

UNIT – II
Grammar : Sentence and Sentence Construction
Vocabulary : Homophones, Homographs, Homonyms
Listening : Listening for Gist and detailed meaning and to identify the attitudes and opinions of
the speakers
Speaking : Mini-presentations on a business theme by organizing a larger unit of discourse
& Giving information and expressing opinions.
Reading : Reading for Opinion and writer‘s purpose, Reading for interpreting the visual
information, reading for gist.
Writing : Writing a longer piece of correspondence based on another text.

UNIT - III
Grammar : Verb - Tense
Vocabulary : Word Formation – prefix and suffix.
Listening : Answering multiple choice questions on short conversations or monologues.
Speaking : Two-way conversation between the candidates followed by further prompting
from the interlocutor.
Reading : Reading for inference and Global meaning, Understanding Vocabulary and
grammar in a short text
Writing : Writing for functional/ communicative task- e.g. Re-arranging appointments,
asking for permission, giving instructions.
UNIT - IV

Grammar : Voice and Reported speech


Vocabulary : Synonyms and Antonyms.
Listening : Listening for completing notes based on conversation on a monologue.
Speaking : Expressing opinions, Agreeing and Disagreeing, Talking about oneself, ones
current situations and plans.
Reading : Reading for understanding short, real world messages etc,
Writing : Writing for apologizing and offering compensation, making or altering
reservations.

UNIT – V

Grammar : Concord, Modal Auxiliary, Question Tags.


Vocabulary : Business Vocabulary.
Listening : Listening for answering multiple choice questions on a longer conversation or
interview.
Speaking : Giving ones opinion on business situations, talking about some prompts for an
extended period of time & Discussion with a business situation with a partner.
Reading : Reading for detailed comprehension of detailed material; Skimming and
Scanning.
Writing : Writing to deal with requests, giving information about a product.
Reference books:

 Business Benchmark - Norman Whitby 

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 28


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

 Business results – Intermediate – John Hughes, John


Newton Web References: 

 www.cambridgeenglish.org 

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 29


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

APPLIED PHYSICS-I

I B.Tech. – I Semester LTPC


Course Code: A2HS06 31- 3

Course Objectives: This AP (Applied Physics) subject is common to CSE, ECE, MECH, AERO & IT
branches of UG Engineering. At the end of the course the student is expected to
1. Summarize the different types of errors.
2. Describe the structures of crystals and study of different X-ray diffraction methods .
3. Explain the origin of Electrical and Magnetic properties of various materials.
4. Learn the properties of laser light and how it is used in various fields.
5. Comparing the different types of imaging and its importance .

Course Outcomes:
The student will be able to
1. Justify the propagation of errors with different methods.
2. Identify and describe crystal structures and size of the unit cell by diffraction methods.
3. Classify various magnetic, dielectric materials and apply knowledge gained in various fields.

4. Analyze why Laser light is more powerful than normal light and how it is used as a surgical
tool.
5. Evaluate the advantages of imaging techniques.

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I

Measurements and Errors : Measurand, precision, accuracy, certainty, resolution; Errors - types
and sources of errors (definitions and examples), Systematic error, Random error, Ambiguity error,
Dynamic error, Drift, Noise.

Data Analysis- Elements of statistics including precision and variance; Propagation of error with
example of Wheatstone bridge, Graphical representation of scientific data.

UNIT-II

Crystal Structures: Lattice points, Space lattice, Basis, Bravias lattice, unit cell and lattice
parameters, Seven Crystal Systems with 14 Bravias lattices , Atomic Radius, Co-ordination Number
and Packing Factor of SC, BCC, FCC, Miller Indices, Inter planer spacing of Cubic crystal system.

X-ray Diffraction: Bragg‘s Law, X-Ray diffraction methods: Laue Method, Powder Method-Merits
and demerits.

UNIT –III

Dielectric Properties: Electric Dipole, Dipole Moment, Dielectric Constant, Polarizability, Electric
Susceptibility, Displacement Vector, Types of polarization: Electronic, Ionic and Orientation
Polarizations and Calculation of Polarizabilities (Electronic & Ionic) -Internal Fields in Solids, Clausius
-Mossotti Equation, Piezo-electricity and Ferro- electricity.

Magnetic Properties: Magnetic Permeability, Magnetic Field Intensity, Magnetic Field Induction,
Intensity of Magnetization, Magnetic Susceptibility, Origin of Magnetic Moment, Bohr Magnetron,
Classification of Dia, Para and Ferro Magnetic Materials on the basis of Magnetic Moment,

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 30


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Hysteresis Curve on the basis of Domain Theory of Ferro Magnetism, Soft and Hard Magnetic
Materials, Ferrites and their Applications.

UNIT – IV

Fundamentals of Laser: characteristics of Laser, Energy levels in atoms, radiation matter interaction,
absorption of light, spontaneous emission of light, Stimulated emission of light , population of energy
levels, Einstein A and B coefficients, Metastable state, population inversion, resonant cavity, excitation
mechanisms, Lasing action.

Types of Lasers & Applications: Solid State Laser: Ruby laser, Gas Laser: He-Ne Laser,
Semiconductor Laser, Applications of Laser: Drilling, welding, micro machining, measurement of long
distances, in CD write devices & printers, in Medicine as a surgical tool.

UNIT – V

Optics: Interference – coherence (spatial, temporal) in thin films of uniform thickness (derivation);
Diffraction Grating – use as a monochromator.

Imaging Techniques: Imaging including importance, types of imaging (microscopes, telescopes,


cameras etc.); Classification (visible, IR, electron, magnetic, UV/X-rays, gamma rays, microwaves);
Comparative study of different types of imaging (with respect to magnification, resolution, image
quality, applications).

TEXT BOOKS

1. Modern Engineering physics : S. Chandralingam, K. Vijayakumar, S Chand Co. 2 .


Engineering Physics: P.K.Palanisamy, Scitech Publishers.
3. Engineering Physics: S.O.Pillai, New age International.
4. Eugene Hecht & A.R Ganesan (2009), Optics, Pearson
5. Bottaccini M.R, E.E. Merill, Instruments and Measurements, Bell and Howell

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Solid State Physics: Charles Kittel, Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd.
2. Fundamentals of physics:Halliday,Resnick,Walker.
3. Francis A.Jenkins, Harvey E. White, Fundamentals of Optics, McGraw Hill
Note: The figures in parentheses indicate approximate number of expected hours of instruction.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 31


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

I B.Tech.- I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS09 3 1 - 3

Course Overview:

This course will involve minimum lecturing, content will be delivered through assigned reading and
reinforced with large and small group discussions, as well as assigned in class (and occasional out of
class) group activities. Water and its treatment for various purposes, engineering materials such as
plastics, composites, ceramic, abrasives, their preparation, properties and applications, conventional
and non-conventional energy sources, nuclear, solar, various batteries, combustion calculations,
corrosion and control of metallic materials.

Course Objectives:
I. Discover the importance of electrical energy originated from chemical reactions articulate and utilize
corrosion prevention strategies and estimate corrosion behavior of materials and components.
II. Describe the role of water as an engineering material in steam and power generation.
III. Substantiate the utility of polymers in chemical and hardware industries. Inculcate knowledge of
basic construction materials with its vital role.
IV. Extrapolate the application of fuels in day to day life.
V. Focus on the behavior of different alloys in metallurgy. Understand the concept of colloid and
extrapolate their applications in industry.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, student will be able to:

1. Extrapolate the knowledge of cell, electrode, cathode, anode, electrolysis, electromotive force and
reference electrode including corrosion of metals.
2.Under standing and Explore the engineering applications of polymeric materials, cement, lubricants
and refractories
3. Interpret the vitality of phase rule in metallurgy.
4. Summarize the application of colloids and nanoparticles on industry level in controlling pollution.

SYLLABUS

UNIT – I ELECTROCHEMISTRY: Introduction, Conductance-Specific, Equivalent and Molar


conductance, effect of dilution on electrolytic conductance. EMF: Galvanic Cells, Nernst equation,
numerical problems. Concept of concentration cells, electro chemical series-applications.

BATTERIES: Primary cells ( dry cells) and secondary cells (lead-Acid cell, Ni-Cd cell). Applications of
batteries.

Fuel cells – Hydrogen – Oxygen fuel cell; Advantages and Applications.

CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL: Introduction, causes of corrosion, theories of corrosion –


Chemical, Electrochemical corrosion. Corrosion control methods – Cathodic protection, sacrificial
anode, impressed current cathode. Surface coatings – electroplating, metal cladding. Hot dipping
(galvanization & tinning).
UNIT–II
WATER TREATMENT: Introduction to Hardness, causes, expression of hardness, units. Types of
hardness. Boiler troubles – Scale & sludges, Priming and foaming, caustic enbrittlement and boiler
corrosion Treatment of water: Internal treatment(phosphate,colloidal,calgon and carbonate treatment)
& External treatments: Lime- soda process, Ion exchange and Zeolite process. Desalination: Reverse
osmosis and its significance. Numerical problems.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 32


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT–III
ENGINEERING MATERIALS: HIGH POLYMERS: Introduction,Cassification of polymers. Plastics:
Thermoplastics & Thermosets. Preparation, properties and engineering applications of plastics: Poly
vinyl chloride, Teflon, Bakelite. Rubbers: Natural rubber and its vulcanization. Synthetic rubbers:
Buna-S. Fibers: preparation, properties and applications of Polyester,Nylon. Conducting Polymers:
mechanism of conduction in poly acetylene and applications of Conducting Polymers .
MATERIALS CHEMISTRY: Lubricants: characteristics of a good lubricant, classification with
examples of lubricants and mechanism of lubrication (thick film , thin film and extreme pressure).
Nanotechnology: Origin of Nanotechnology, Nano Scale, Surface to Volume Ratio, Bottom-up
Fabrication: Sol-gel Process; Top-down Fabrication: Chemical Vapor Deposition, Physical, Chemical
and Optical properties of Nano materials, Characterization (SEM, TEM ,XRD), Applications.
UNIT–IV
ENERGY SOURCES: Fuels: Classification fuels: Calorific value (LCV & HCV) and problems solid,
liquid, gaseous fuels. Solid fuels: Coal- Its analysis by proximate and ultimate analysis. Liquid fuels:
Petroleum and its refining. Gaseous fuels: Natural gas, LPG, CNG and their applications. Flue gas:
Analysis of Flue gas by Orsat‘s method. Combustion- problems
UNIT–V
PHASE RULE: Gibb‘s phase rule equation. Definition of Terms: Phase, Components and Degrees of
Freedom. Significance and limitations of phase rule. Phase diagrams: One component system- Water
system. Two component system- Silver- lead system.
SURFACE CHEMISTRY: Adsorption: Types of adsorption. Adsorption isotherm: Langmuir adsorption
isotherm, applications of adsorption. Colloids: Classification of colloids. Properties of colloids:
Electrical & optical properties. Applications of colloids.

TEXT BOOKS

1. PC Jain & Monica Jain, (2008). Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpatrai Publishing Company.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. S.S Dara & Mukkanti, (2006). Engineering Chemistry, S. Chand & Co. New Delhi.
2. K.N Mishra, R.P Mani &B. Rama Devi(2009). Chemistry of Engineering Materials, CENGAGE.
3. J.C Kuriacase & J Raja ram (2004), Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw Hills Co. New Delhi.
4. Engineering Chemistry by M Tirumala Chary & E. Laxminarayana (Second Edition), Scitech
Publications, Chennai.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 33


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

I B.Tech.- I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2CS01 3 1 - 3

Course objectives
I. Learn how to write modular, efficient and readable C programs
II. Declare and manipulate single and multi-dimensional arrays of the C data types.
III. Describe the techniques for creating program modules in C using functions and recursive
functions.
IV. Create and manage derived data types and perform operations on files.
V. Utilize pointers and dynamic memory allocation functions to efficiently solve problems

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the students are expected to:
1. Write, compile and debug programs in C language.
2. Use different data types in a computer program.
3. Design programs involving decision structures, loops, arrays and functions.
4. Explain the difference between call by value and call by reference
5. Understand the dynamics of memory by the use of pointers.
6. Use different file operations to create/update basic data files.

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
Introduction to the C Language – Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow chart, Background, C Programs,
Identifiers, Data Types, Variables, Constants, Input / Output, Operators(Arithmetic, relational, logical,
bitwise etc.), Expressions, PrMECHdence and Associativity, Expression Evaluation, Type
conversions, Statements- Selection Statements(making decisions) – if and switch statements,
Repetition statements ( loops)-while, for, do-while statements, Loop examples, other statements
related to looping – break, continue, goto, Simple C Program examples.

UNIT-II
Functions- Introduction to Structured Programming, Functions- basics, user defined functions, inter
function communication(call by value, call by reference), Standard functions, Storage classes-auto,
register, static, extern, scope rules, arrays to functions, recursive functions, example C programs.
Arrays– Basic concepts, one-dimensional arrays, two – dimensional arrays, multidimensional arrays,
C programming examples

UNIT–III
Pointers – Introduction (Basic Concepts), pointers to pointers, compatibility, Pointer Applications-
Arrays and Pointers, Pointer Arithmetic, memory allocation functions, array of pointers, pointers to
void, pointers to functions, command –line arguments.
Strings – Concepts, C Strings, String Input / Output functions, string manipulation functions, string /
data conversion, C program examples.

UNIT-IV
Enumerated, Structure ,and Union Types– The Type Definition(typedef), Enumerated types,
Structures –Declaration, initialization, accessing structures, operations on structures, Complex
structures, structures and functions, Passing structures through pointers, self referential structures,
unions, bit fields, C programming examples

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 34


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT-V
Input and Output – Concept of a file, streams, text files and binary files, Differences between text
and binary files, State of a file, Opening and Closing files, file input / output functions (standard library
input / output functions for files), file status functions (error handling),Positioning functions, C program
examples.

TEXT BOOKS
1.Computer Science: A Structured Programming Approach Using C, B.A.Forouzan and R.F. Gilberg,
Third Edition, Cengage Learning.
2.The C Programming Language by Brian Kernighan and Dennis Ritchie 2nd edition

REFERENCE BOOKS
1.Let Us C Yashavant kanetkar BPB.
2.Absolute beginner's guide to C, Greg M. Perry, Edition 2,Publisher: Sams Pub., 1994.
3.Computer Programming and Data Structures by E Balagurusamy, Tata McGraw Hill.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 35


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB

I B.Tech. – I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS12 - - 3 2
Course Overview
English- being the foremost global language has its domination in internationally sensitive domains
such as science and technology, business and commercial relation, education and diplomatic
relationships, politics and administration and so on. It is the language of corporate India, a passport
for better career, better pay, and advanced knowledge and for communication with the entire world. In
higher education, English is the prevalent prestigious language. Careers in any area of business
communication or within the government, or in science and technology require fluency in English. It is
certainly considered instrumental in terms of having access to information from all over the world as a
key factor for professional success. With the number of foreign investors flocking to India and the
growth of outsourcing, English has come to play a key role for the transactions in written form in
professional relationships between foreign and Indian companies. Hence in the existing world of
cutthroat completion, it is vital to the students pursuing Engineering course to have a command not
only on the academic skills but also on communication skills. The basic idea behind offering English
as a practical subject at the undergraduate level is to acquaint students with a language that enjoys
currency as a lingua franca of the globe. For prospective engineers nothing could be more useful or
productive than being able to reach out to the world of technology. In the ELCS lab the students are
trained in Communicative English Skills, phonetics, word accent, word stress, rhythm and intonation,
making effective oral presentations- both extempore and Prepared- seminars, group discussions,
presenting techniques of writing, role play, telephonic skills, asking and giving directions, information
transfer , debates, description of person, place, objects etc; . The lab encourages students to work in
a group, engage in peer-reviews and inculcate team spirit through various exercises on grammar,
vocabulary, listening and pronunciation games, etc.

Course Objectives

I. To facilitate computer-aided multi-media instruction enabling individualized and independent


language learning
II. To sensitize the students to the nuances of English speech sounds, word accent, intonation
and rhythm
III. To bring about a consistent accent and intelligibility in their pronunciation of English by
providing an opportunity for practice in speaking
IV. To improve the fluency in spoken English and neutralize mother tongue influence
V. To train students to use language appropriately for interviews, group discussion and public
speaking.
VI. To enhance the communication skills of the students

Supported Objectives

Upon successful completion of this course, student will be able to:


1. To expose the students to a variety of self-instructional and learner-friendly modes
of language learning.
2. To help the students to cultivate the habit of reading passages from the computer
monitor, thus provides them the required facility to face computer-based competitive
exams such as GRE, TOEFL, and GMAT etc.
3. To enable them to learn better pronunciation through stress or word accent, intonation,
and rhythm.
4. To train them to face interviews with confidence and enable them to prepare resume with
cover letter.
5. To motivate them to use language effectively.
6. To prepare them to use communicative language and participate in public speaking.
Course Outcomes
The following outcomes are achieved:

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 36


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

1. Learners learn how to pronounce words using the rules they have been taught.
2. Students learn the importance of speaking English using rhythm and intonation.
3. Students learn to overcome stage fear and make presentations with ease.
4. Students learn to use right words and phrases in keeping the demands of occasion.
5. Students learn to face different types of interviews with confidence.
6. Students learn to participate in group discussions.
7. Students learn to distinguish informal speech from formal speech through role plays.
8. Students learn to use the telephone etiquettes.

SYLLABUS

a. Computer Assisted Language Learning (CALL) Lab


b. Interactive Communication Skills (ICS) Lab
The following course content is prescribed for the English Communication Skills Lab
Exercise – I
CALL Lab: Introduction to Phonetics – classification of consonant sounds and vowel sounds-
speech organs
ICS Lab: Ice-Breaking activity & JAM Session
Exercise – II
CALL Lab: Introduction to Syllable-classification of syllable-consonant clusters-minimal
pairs ICS Lab: telephone etiquettes & Situational dialogues
Exercise - III
CALL Lab: Introduction to Word accent or Stress-stress shift-rules of word stress
ICS Lab: describing objects/people/places & Group discussion
Exercise – IV
CALL Lab: Introduction to Intonation-functions of intonation-tone groups
ICS Lab: Skit
Exercise – V
CALL Lab: past tense marker (-ed) rules-plural marker(-s) rules-‗r‘ pronunciation
rules ICS Lab: Giving directions & Extempore- Public Speaking
Suggested Software:

• K-Van solutions Software with CD


• The Rosetta stone English library.
• Clarity pronunciation power –part I.
• Oxford advanced learner‘s compass, 7th Edition.
• Learning to speak English -4 CDs.
• Vocabulary in use, Michael McCarthy, felicity o‘den, Cambridge.
• Murphy‘s English grammar, Cambridge with CD.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Suresh Kumar. E. & Sreehari P.A (2007), Handbook for English Language Laboratories,
2. Cambridge University Press India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.
3. Mandal S. K (2006),Effective Communication & Public Speaking , Jaico Publishing House,
New Delhi.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 37


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COMPUTER PROGRAMMING USING C LAB

I B.Tech. – I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2CS02 - - 3 2

Course objectives

I. Gain a working knowledge of C programming to write modular, efficient and readable C


programs by Identifying the structural elements and layout of C source code.
II. Declare and manipulate single and multi-dimensional arrays of the C data types and derived
data types like structures, unions.
III. Use functions from the portable C library and to describe the techniques for creating program
modules using functions and recursive functions.
IV. Manipulate character strings in C programs. Utilize pointers to efficiently solve problems.
V. Allocate memory to variables dynamically and Perform operations on text and binary files.

Course Outcomes

Upon completion of the course, the students are expected to:

1. Understand the basic terminology used in computer programming and to write, compile and
debug programs in C language.
2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops ,arrays and functions.
3. Understand the dynamics of memory by the use of pointers.
4. Use different file operations to create/update basic data files.

EXPERIMENTS

1. Expression evaluation
2. Basic control flow
3.Advanced control
flow 4.Arrays
5.Functions
6.Recursion
7.Structures
8.Strings
9.Pointers
10.Numerical Approximation

TEXT BOOKS

1. C Programming and Data Structures, P.Padmanabham, Third Edition, BS Publications


d
2. C.Programming, E.Balaguruswamy, 3r edition, TMH Publishers

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 38


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

I B.Tech. – I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME03 11 3 3

Course Overview

This course is an introduction to the students about Engineering drawings that are usually created in
accordance with standardized conventions for layout, nomenclature, interpretation, appearance (such
as typefaces and line styles), size, etc. The drawing technique is emphasized in how to draw an
object graphically and projection drawing from different point of view. In the end, the student is
capable of drawing different components. Rather than using conventional tools for drawing, students
are made to use CAD software .The use of CAD process provides enhanced graphics capabilities
which allows any designer to conceptualize his ideas, modify the design very easily, perform
animation, and use colors, fonts and other aesthetic features. Knowledge of basic computer
operations and Windows is required.

Course Objectives

I. To create awareness and emphasize the need for Engineering Drawing in various branches
of engineering.
II. To enable the student with various concepts of dimensioning, conventions and
standards related to engineering drawings.
III. To enable the student follow the basic drawing standards and conventions. IV.
To develop skills in three-dimensional visualization of engineering component.

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

1. Understand and prepare engineering drawings of simple objects.


2. Solve specific geometrical problems in plane geometry involving lines, plane figures and
special Curves.
3. Produce orthographic projection of engineering components from pictorial drawings.

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING DRAWING: Principles of engineering graphics and their
significance – drawing instruments and their use – conventions in drawing – lettering – BIS
conventions. Dimensioning rules, geometrical construction.
SCALES: Different types of scales, plain scales, diagonal scales, comparative scales, vernier scales,
scale of chords.

UNIT – II
CURVES USED IN ENGINEERING PRACTICE AND THEIR CONSTRUCTIONS: Conic Sections,
Special Curves and Involutes.

UNIT - III
DRAWING OF PROJECTIONS OR VIEWS: ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTION IN FIRST ANGLE
PROJECTION ONLY (Points and Lines): Principles of orthographic projections – conventions – first
and third angle projections. Projections of points and lines inclined to planes, true lengths, traces,
application problems.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 39


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT - IV
PROJECTIONS OF PLANES: Projections of regular planes, inclined to both planes.
UNIT - V
PROJECTIONS OF SOLIDS: Projections of regular solids, Projections of regular solids inclined to
both planes.

TEXT BOOKS
1. N. D. Bhat (2006), Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publications, New Delhi.
2. R.B. Choudary (2005), Engineering graphics with Auto CAD, Anuradha Publishers, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS
nd
1. Venugopal (2010), Engineering Drawing and Graphics, 2 edition, New Age Publications,
New Delhi.
2. Johle (2009), Engineering Drawing, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, India.
3. Trymbaka Murthy (2007), Computer Aided Engineering Drawing, I.K. International Publishers,
New Delhi.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 40


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

TECHNICAL SEMINAR-I
MANDATORY NON-CREDIT COURSE

I B.Tech. – I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS19 - - 2 -

Objective
Seminar is an important component of learning in an Engineering College, where the student
gets acquainted with preparing a report & presentation on a topic.

PERIODICITY / FREQUENCY OF EVALUATION : Twice

PARAMETERS OF EVALUATION:
1. The seminar shall have topic allotted and approved by the faculty.
2. The seminar is evaluated for 25 marks for internal and 25 marks for external.
3. The students shall be required to submit the rough drafts of the seminar outputs
within one week of the commencement of the class work.
4. Faculty shall make suggestions for modification in the rough draft. The final draft shall
be presented by the student within a week thereafter.
5. Presentation schedules will be prepared by Department in line with the academic
calendar.

The Seminars shall be evaluated in two stages as follows:

A. Rough draft

In this stage, the student should collect information from various sources on the topic and
collate them in a systematic manner. He/ She may take the help of the concerned faculty.

The report should be typed in ―MS-Word‖ file with ―calibri‖ font, with font size of 16 for main
heading, 14 for sub-headings and 11 for the body text. The contents should also be arranged
in Power Point Presentation with relevant diagrams, pictures and illustrations. It should
normally contain 10 to 15 slides, consisting of the followings:

1. Topic, name of the student & faculty 1 Slide


2. List of contents 1 Slide
3. Introduction 1Slide
4. Descriptions of the topic (point-wise) 6 - 10 Slides
5. Conclusion 1 - 2 Slides
6. References/Bibliography 1 Slide

The soft copy of the rough draft of the seminar presentation in MS Power Point format along
with the draft report should be submitted to the concerned faculty, with a copy to the
concerned HOD within stipulated time.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 41


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

The evaluation of the rough draft shall generally be based upon the following.

1 Punctuality in submission of rough draft 2


2 Dress Code 3
3 Resources from which the seminar have been based 2
4 Report , and content of Presentation 5
5 Depth of the students knowledge in the subject 5
6 Reception from Questions 5
7 Time Management, Classroom Dynamic 3
Total Marks 25

After evaluation of the first draft the supervisor shall suggest further reading, additional work
and fine tuning, to improve the quality of the seminar work.

Within 7 days of the submission of the rough draft, the students are to submit the final draft
incorporating the suggestions made by the faculty.

B. Presentation: (External )

After finalization of the final draft, the students shall be allotted dates for presentation (in the
designated seminar classes) and they shall then present it in presence students, HOD,
Incharge, faculties of the department and at least one faculty from some department / other
department.

The student shall submit 3 copies of the Report neatly bound along with 2 soft copies of the
PPT in DVD medium. The students shall also distribute the title and abstract of the seminar in
hard copy to the audience. The final presentation has to be delivered with 18-25 slides.

The evaluation of the Presentation shall generally be based upon the following.

1. Contents 5 Marks
2. Delivery 5 Marks
3. Relevance and interest the topic creates 5 Marks
4. Ability to involve the spectators 5 Marks
5. Question answer session 5 Marks
Total 50 Marks

4. WHO WILL EVALUATE?


The presentation of the seminar topics shall be made before an internal evaluation committee
comprising the Head of the Department or his/her nominee, seminar supervisor and a senior faculty of
the department / other department

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 42


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

I B.TECH II SEMESTER
SYLLABUS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 43


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

LINEAR ALGEBRA AND INTEGRAL TRANSFORMS

I B.Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS03 3 1 - 3
CourseOverview:

This course focus on basic areas of theory and more advanced Engineering Mathematics topics
which provide students with the relevant mathematical tools required in the analysis of problems in
Engineering and scientific professions. The topics covered include solutions for linear systems,
Eigen values and Eigen vectors, linear transformation, Laplace transforms, Application of partial
differential equations, Fourier Transforms. The mathematical skills derived from this course form a
necessary base to analytical and design concepts encountered in the program

Prerequisite(s):

• NIL
CourseObjectives:

I. Learn concepts of matrix algebra, methods of solving system of linear equations and
determine eigen values and eigen vectors of a matrix
II. Understand how the eigen values and eigen vectors of Hermitian, Unitary and Normal
matrices differ from those of general matrices.
III. Know the basic properties of standard partial differential equations to solve
engineering problems
IV. Determine the Fourier Transforms of a given function.
V. Analyze the characteristics and properties of Fourier transforms

CourseOutcomes:

After completing this course, the student will be able to:

1. Use elementary transformations to reduce matrices to echelon form, normal form and hence
find their rank.
2. Make use of echelon forms in finding the solution of system of linear equations.
3. Compute eigen values and eigen vectors of square matrices. Reduce the quadratic form to
canonical form.
4. Apply Laplace transform to solve differential equations which will be converted toalgebraic
equatin.

5 Determine Fourier transform, Fourier sine and cosine transform of a function


6 Apply partial differential equations to solve engineering problems.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 44


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT – I

THEORY OF MATRICES:Real matrices: Symmetric-skew-symmetric and orthogonal matrices –


Complex matrices: Hermitian, Skew –Hermitian and Unitary matrices –Elementary row and column
transformations –Elementary matrix-Finding rank of a matrix by reducing to Echelon form and
Normal form-Finding the inverse of a matrix using elementary row/column transformations (Gauss-
Jordan method)-Consistency of system of linear equations (homogeneous and non-homogeneous)
using the rank of a matrix –Solving m n and n n linear system of equations by Gauss Elimination-
Cayley-Hamilton Theorem (Statement and verification)-Finding inverse and powers of a matrix by
Cayley-Hamilton Theorem
UNIT – II

LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS: Linear dependence and independence of vectors –Linear


Transformation, orthogonal transformation-Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a matrix-properties of
eigen values and eigen vectors of real and complex matrices- Diagonalization of a matrix. Quadratic
forms up to three variables-Rank, Index, Signature and Nature of Quadratic form-Reduction of a
Quadratic form to canonical form using linear and orthogonal transformations.
UNIT – III
LAPLACE TRANSFORM AND ITS APPLICATIONS TO ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS:
Laplace transforms of elementary functions- First shifting theorem - Change of scale property –
n
Multiplication by t - Division by t – Laplace transforms of derivatives and integrals – Unit step function
– Second shifting theorem – Periodic function – Evaluation of integrals by Laplace transforms –
Inverse Laplace transforms- Method of partial fractions – Other methods of finding inverse transforms
– Convolution theorem – Applications of Laplace transforms to ordinary differential equations.

UNIT – IV
FOURIER TRANSFOREMS: Fourier integral theorem (statement)-Fourier sine and cosine integrals
–Fourier transforms –Fourier sine and cosine transforms-properties- Inverse transforms-Finite
Fourier transforms – Parseval‘s Identity.

UNIT – V
SECOND ORDER PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND APPLICATIONS:Method of
separation of variables for second order equations-Applications of Partial differential equations- one
dimensional wave equation, Heat equation.

TEXT BOOKS
1.Higher Engineering Mathematics by Dr.B.S.Grewal, Khanna publishers.
2.Engineering mathematics Vol –I by Garg and Guptha, person publishers
3.Advanced Engineering Mathematics by R K Jain& S R K Iyengar,Narosa Publishers

REFERENCE BOOKS
1.Advanced Engineering Mathematics by E. Kreyszig, John Wiley & Sons Publisher.
2.Engineering Mathematics by N.P.Balil, Lakshmi Publications.
3.Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Michael Greenberg, pearson Education.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 45


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

APPLIED PHYSICS-II
I B.Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS07 3 1 - 3

Course Objectives: This AP (Applied Physics) subject is common to CSE, ECE, MECH, AERO &
IT branches of UG Engineering. At the end of the course the student is expected to:
1.Learn the behavior of matter waves and applications of Schrodinger wave equations
Periodic Potential Energy of Electron.
2. Explain the classification of semiconductors and design of LED,LCD Solar cell
3.Discuss the different types of optical fibers how it is used for communication in optical fiber
networks.
4. Explain the engineering applications of ultrasonics and how super conductors are used in
transmission lines.
5.Describe the basics of quantum teleportation.

Course OutcomesL:

The student will be able to

1. Prove that energies of electron is quantized when particle is moving in a potential box.
2. Analyze the type of semiconductors and construction of LCD with different material.
3. Justifying the optical fiber is more advantage than cables and optical fiber in sensor
application.
4. Analyze the engineering applications of ultrasonics.
5. Analyze the impossibility of faster than light transfer of information.
SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
Quantum Mechanics: Waves and Particles, de Broglie Hypothesis, Matter Waves, Davisson and
Germer‘s Experiment, Heisenberg‘s Uncertainty Principle, Schrodinger‘s Time Independent
Wave Equation-Physical Significance of the wave Function, Particle in One Dimensional
Potential Box.
Band Theory of Solids: Fermi-Dirac Statistics (Qualitative treatment), Electron in a periodic
potential, Bloch theorem, Kronig –Penny Model (Qualitative treatment), Origin of Energy Band
formation in Solids, Classification of Materials into Conductors, Semiconductors & Insulators,
Effective mass of an Electron.
UNIT-II
Semiconductor Physics: Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Fermi Level, Fermi level in Intrinsic
and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Direct and Indirect Band gap semiconductors, Hall Effect and
Applications.
Physics of Semiconductor Devices: LED materials, Construction and Working of LED, Advantages
and Disadvantages. LCD-Characteristics of LCD, Action of LCD display device. Solar Cells-
Photovoltaic effect, Efficiency Issues, Solar materials, Advantages of Solar cells.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 46


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT –III

Fundamentals of Fiber Optics: Structure and Principle of Optical Fiber, Acceptance Angle,
Numerical Aperture, Types of Optical Fibers (SMSI, MMSI, MMGI), Attenuation in Optical
Fibers, Optical fiber Communication System with block diagram.

Fiber Optics sensors: Classification of Optical sensors, Pressure or Temperature Sensors


and Displacement Sensors, Liquid level Sensors.

UNIT – IV

Ultrasonics: Introduction-prodection of Ultrasonic waves-piezoelectric and magnetostriction


method, properties and Detection of Ultrasonic waves, Engineering applications of Ultrasonics
(Non-destrictive testing,cavitation,measurement of gauge).

Superconductivity: Zero resistance, Critical temperature Tc ,Perfect diamagnetism,


Meissner effect, Critical field Hc, Type I and Type II superconductors, Cooper pairs and
formation of superconducting gap at Fermi level, Electron-Phonon interaction and BCS
theory, Applications – Superconducting magnets, Transmission lines.

UNIT – V

Quantum computation: Idea of qubit and examples of single qubit logic gates – classical
bits, Qubit as a two level system; Bloch vector representation of state of qubit;

Classical cryptography: Introduction to cryptography, Vermam cipher; Public key


cryptosystem; The RSA protocol; Comments on No cloning theorem; BB84 protocol,
Quantum Teleportation – Basic Idea;

TEXT BOOKS

1. Modern Engineering physics : S. Chandralingam, K. Vijayakumar, S Chand Co.


2. Engineering Physics: P.K.Palanisamy, Scitech Publishers.
3. Engineering Physics: S.O.Pillai, New age International.
4. Nielsen M. A., I. L Chung, Quantum Computation & Quantum Information, Cambridge
Univ. Press
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Solid State Physics: Charles Kittel, Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd.
2. Fundamentals of physics:Halliday,Resnick,Walker.
3. Engineering Physics – By V Rajendran, Mc Graw Hill Edn.
rd
4. Solar Photovoltaics – Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications 3 Edition, PHI
5. Modern Engineering Physics – By S.L Gupta & Sanjeev Gupta, Dhanpat Rai Publications.
6. Principles of Quantum computation and Information – By G. Benenti, G. Casati, G. Strini,
World scientific.
Note: The figures in parentheses indicate approximate number of expected hours of instruction.,

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 47


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

I B.Tech.-II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2EC02 3 - - 3

Course Overview:
This is a basic course for all Engineering students of first Year. The objective is to make them familiar
with basic principles of Electrical Engineering. The course addresses the underlying concepts &
methods behind Electrical Engineering. The course is present a problem oriented introductory
knowledge of the Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and to focus on the study of basic electrical
parameters, basic principles, different types of electrical circuit and methods to solve electrical circuit.

Prerequisite(s): NIL

Course Objectives
I. Describe basic fundamentals of Electric Circuits, their components and the mathematical
tools used to represent and analyze Electrical circuits.
II. Develop fundamentals, including Ohm‘s law, Kirchoff‘s laws and be able to solve for
currents, voltages and power in complex circuits.
III. Demonstrate to write and solve loop current and node voltage equations for arbitrary DC,
AC networks including resistors, capacitors, inductors, dependent and independent sources.
IV. Extrapolate the concept of magnetic circuit, Faraday‘s laws and analyze the series and
parallel magnetic circuits.
V. Summarize various two port network parameters and their relations and develop the design
and analysis of basic DC and AC circuits with network topologies.

Course Outcomes
1. Define basic electrical concepts, including electric charge, current, electrical potential,
electrical Power and energy.
2. Distinguish the relationship of voltage and current in resistors, capacitors, inductors,
and mutual Inductors.
3. Differentiate circuits with ideal, independent, and controlled voltage and current sources
and able to apply Kirchhoff‘s voltage and current laws to the analysis of electric circuits.
4. Illustrate to apply concepts of electric network topology, nodes, branches, and loops to
solve circuit problems, including the use of computer simulation.
5. Emphasize on basic laws and techniques to develop a working knowledge of the methods
of analysis used.
6. Interpret to solve series and parallel magnetic circuits
7. Design various two port network parameters and relations between them

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 48


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT- I
Electrical Circuits
Basic definitions-Ohm‘s Law – Kirchhoff‘s Laws – simple problems. types of elements, types of
sources, resistive networks, inductive networks, capacitive networks, series & parallel circuits, star to
delta and delta to star transformations.

UNIT- II
DC Machines
Principle of Operation of DC Motor, types of DC motor, Losses and Torque equation , DC Generator
construction and working Principle, EMF Equation, working principle and Construction of transformer.

UNIT- III
AC Machines & Instruments
Principle of operation of 3-phase induction motor, slip and torque Equation, principle of operation of 3-
phase Alternator. Basic principle of indicating instruments, permanent magnet moving coil and moving
iron instruments.

UNIT- IV
Semiconductor Devices
Characteristics of PN Junction Diode – Zener Effect – Zener Diode and its Characteristics. Rectifiers,
Half wave, Full wave and bridge Rectifiers – filters capacitor, inductor-Voltage Regulation.

UNIT- V
Transistor
Bipolar Junction Transistor – CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics – Transistor Amplifier.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Basic Electrical Engineering by M.S.Naidu and S.Kamakshaiah TMH
2. Electronic Devices and circuits by J.Millman, C.C.Halkias and Satyabrata Jit 2ed.,

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraleedharan K A, ―Basic Electrical, Electronics and
Computer Engineering‖,Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, (2006).
2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, ―Basics of Electrical Engineering‖, Oxford press (2005).
3. Mehta V K, ―Principles of Electronics‖, S.Chand & Company Ltd, (1994).

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 49


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COMPUTATIONAL METHODS & INTEGRAL CALCULUS

I B.Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS02 3 - - 3

CourseOverview:

Thecoursematterisdividedinto5chapterscoveringduly-recognizedareasoftheoryandstudy.This
CoursedealswithmoreadvancedEngineeringMathematicsandStatisticstopicswhichprovidestude
nts with the relevant mathematical and statistical tools required in the analysis of problems in
engineeringand scientific professions. The topics covered include probability, random variables
and distributions,solutions of algebraic and transcendental equations, interpolation, curve
fitting, numerical integration andnumerical solution of ordinary differential equations, Improper
integration, multiple integrals and their applications, Vector integral theorems(Green‘s, Stoke‘s
and Gauss‘s divergence theorems). The mathematical skills derived from this course forma
necessary base to analytical and design concepts encountered in the programme.
Prerequisite(s):NIL

CourseObjectives:

I. Develop an understanding of the role of distributions inengineering.


II. Acquaint students with the fundamental concepts of solving algebraic
andtranscendental equations.
III. Develop an understanding of the role of Numerical Analysis inengineering. To
IV. gain experience of doing independent study andresearch.
CourseOutcomes:

Up on successful completion of this course, student will be ableto:

1. Classify discrete and continuous distributionfunctions.


2. Determine numerical solution of Non Linearequations.
3. Discuss the Stability of a system ofequations.
4. Demonstrate the use of curve fitting in correlation and regressionanalysis.
5. Explain numerical differentiation andintegration.
6. Examine numerical interpolation and approximation offunctions.
7. Interpret errors in Numerical Methods.
8. Evaluate double integrals by changing variables, changing order and triple integration
to find the area and volume of given region.
9. Apply Beta and Gamma functions to evaluate improper integrals.
10. Apply Green‘s theorem to evaluate line integrals along simple closed contours on the
plane, Stoke‘s theorem to give physical interpretation of the curl of a vector field and
Divergencetheorem to give physical interpretation of the divergence of a vectorfield.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 50


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
ALGEBRAIC AND TRANSCENDENTAL EQUATIONS:
Introduction – Graphical interpretation of solution of equations. Bisection method - Regula-falsi
method - Iteration method - Newton-Raphson method – Solving system of non-homogeneous
equations by L – U decomposition method (Crouts method) – Jacobi‘s Method – Gauss seidel
iteration method.

UNIT-II
INTERPOLATION: Finite differences: Forward, Backward and Central differences - Other difference
operators and relations between them - Differences of a polynomial – Missing terms - Newton‘s
forward interpolation, Newton‘s backward interpolation, Gauss‘s forward and backward interpolation
formulae and Stirling‘s formula. Interpolation with unequal intervals – Lagrange‘s interpolation.
CURVE FITTING: Method of least squares - Fitting a straight line, second degree parabola and non-
bx b, x
linear curves of the form y= a e , y= a x y = a b by the method of least squares.
UNIT-III
NUMERICAL INTEGRATION :
Newton-cotes quadrature formula - Trapezoidal rule - Simpson‘s one-third rule - Simpson‘s three-
eighth rule.

NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS: Taylor‘s series method –


Picard‘s method - Euler‘s - modified Euler‘s Method - Runge-Kutta method

UNIT- IV
IMPROPER INTEGRATION,MULTIPLE INTEGRALS & APPLICATION
BETA AND GAMMA FUNCTIONS: Relation between them, their properties – Evaluation of improper
integrals using Gamma/Beta function.
MULTIPLE INTEGRALS: Double and triple integrals – Change of order of integration-Change of
variables in double integrals.Finding the area and volume of a region using double and triple
integration

UNIT-V
VECTOR CALCULUS: Scalar and vector point functions - Gradient, divergence, curl and their related
properties -Solenoidal and irrotational vector point functions - Scalar potential function - Laplacian
operator - Line integral - work done - surface integrals - volume integral - Vector integral theorems -
Green‘s theorem in a plane - Stoke‘s theorem - Gauss divergence theorem (all theorem statements
and their verification)

TEXT BOOKS
1.Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation by M.K. Jain, S.R.K.Iyengar and
R.K. Jain, New Age International Publishers
2. Higher Engineering Mathematics by Dr.B.S.Grewal, Khanna publishers.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis by S. S. Sastry, PHIL Learning Pvt.Ltd
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by E. Kreyszig, John Wiley & Sons Publisher.
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Lawrence Turyn, CRC press.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 51


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING MECHANICS

I B.Tech.- II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME01 3 1 - 3

Course Overview

This subject provides an introduction to the mechanics of materials and structures. You will be
introduced to and become familiar with all relevant physical properties and fundamental laws
governing the behaviour of materials and structures and you will learn how to solve a variety of
problems

Course Objectives

This course is to introduce the basic principles of engineering mechanics with emphasis on their
analysis and application to practical engineering problems. After learning this course, you should have
the ability to:

I. Solve for the resultants of any force systems


II. Determine equivalent force systems
III. Determine the internal forces in plane frames, simple span trusses and beams
IV. Solve the mechanics problems associated with friction forces
V. Obtain the centroid, first moment and second moment of an area
VI. Describe the motion of a particle in terms of its position, velocity and acceleration in different
frames of reference
VII. Analyze the forces causing the motion of a particle
VIII. Use the equation of motion to describe the accelerated motion of a particle
IX. Apply work, energy, impulse and momentum relationships for a particle in motion
X. Describe the motion of a rigid body in different frames of reference

Course Outcomes

1. Students practice in applying their knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering


and to expand this knowledge into the vast area of ―rigid body Mechanics‖ .
2. Students‘ able to design by requiring the solution of open ended problems.
3. Students are able to do various problems on Mechanics of Solids, Mechanical Design and
Structural Analysis.

SYLLABUS

UNIT – I
Introduction to Engineering Mechanics – Basic Concepts, Laws of Motion, Force-types,
characteristics- Principle of transmissibility.
Systems of Forces:Classification, Coplanar Concurrent Forces – Components of force in Space –
Resultant- Triangle law of Forces-Polygon law of Forces- Parallelogram Law of Forces-Resolution and
composition of Forces–Coplanar Non-Concurrent System of Forces,Resultant of Parallel system of
Forces -Moment of Force and its Application – Varignon‘s theorem, Couples.

UNIT – II
Equilibrium of Systems of Forces:Free Body Diagrams, Types of Supports and their reactions,
Internal and External Forces - Types of Equilibrium, Equations of Equilibrium, Conditions of
Equilibrium, Equilibrium of bodies under Coplanar concurrent system of forces -Lamis Theorem,
Converse of the law of Triangle of forces, converse of the law of polygon of forces. Equilibrium of
Spatial Systems for concurrent forces.

UNIT – III
Centroid :Centroids of Lines and Areas (from basic principles ) –simple figures– Centroid of
Composite Figures- Centroid of L, T, I,Z and channel Sections.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 52


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Centre of Gravity:Centre of gravity of simple solids (from basic principles), centre of gravity of
composite solids, Pappu‘s-Guldinu‘s theorems.

UNIT – IV
Area moment of Inertia : Definition –Moment of inertia of plane areas, Polar Moment of Inertia,
Transfer Theorem, Moments of Inertia of Composite Figures, Moment of Inertia of Sections, Products
of Inertia, Transfer Formula for Product of Inertia.
Mass Moment of Inertia: Moment of Inertia of Simple solids, Transfer Formula for Mass Moments of
Inertia, mass moment of inertia of composite bodies.

UNIT – V
Friction: Definitions-Types of Friction – Limiting Friction – laws of Static and Dynamic Frictions –
Angle of friction- Angle of Repose- Cone of Friction-Equilibrium of rigid body on an Inclined plane -
Application of Friction – Ladder, Wedge and Screw friction.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Engineering. Mechanics / Timoshenko & Young.
2. Engineering. Mechanics / S.S. Bhavikatti& J.G. Rajasekharappa

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering. Mechanics / D.S.Kumar
2. Engineering. Mechanics / R.V. Kulkarni & R.D. Askhevkar
3. Engineering. Mechanics /R.S. Khurmi / S.Chand.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 53


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

APPLIED PHYSICS & ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB

I B.Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS10 - - 3 2
PART-A
APPLIED PHYSICS LAB

Course Overview:
Applied Physics laboratory course includes the experimental methods for the determination of the
mechanical property (Rigidity modulus of a given material), frequency of an AC Signal, basic
electronic circuits (LED, RC, LCR circuits), and to study characteristics of LASERS & Optical fiber
(LASER wavelength, divergence, Numerical aperture of fiber, Losses in fibers) and Polarisation of
light. And also about study of Hall effect , Planck‘ s constant. This interdisciplinary knowledge is
designed for the continuous innovation occurring with technology.

Course Objectives:
The experiments are selected from various area of Physics like Physical Optics, Lasers, Fiber
Optics, Mechanics, Electricity & Magnetism and Basic Electronics.
I. To describe the rigidity modulus of given wire by using Torsional pendulum
II. To impart knowledge of LED and SOLAR CELLS.
III. To familiarize the propagation of laser light and how it is used for communication in Optical
Communication network.
IV. To teach how to calculate energy gap of given semiconductor
V. To describe Metling point of solids
VI. To describe the phenomenon of Hall effect and Calculation of Plank Constant.

Course Outcomes:
Up on successful completion of this course, student will be able to:

1. Identify elastic materials and modulus by its properties


2. Select LED or SOLAR CELL for variety of applications
3. Analyze energy gap of semiconductor, Resonance of LCR and Time Constant of RC circuits
4. Analyze the wavelength of laser source using diffraction grating.
5. Evaluate the magnetic field along the axis of a current carrying coil by using Stewart&Gee‘s
apparatus and Speed of light in glass
6. Compare the interference phenomenon by using Newton‘s ring apparatus.
7. Analyze how Haidinger fringes are used to measure thickness of given thin film

List of Experiments:
(Any 06 experiments compulsory)

1. Error Analysis and Graph Drawing


2. Study of V-I characteristics of an LED
3. Determination of numerical aperture – optical Fibers.
4. Study of V-I characteristics of Solar Cell
5. Determination of Energy gap of a given Semiconductor material
6. Determination of rigidity modulus of the material of a given wire-Torsional Pendulum
7. Determination of wavelength of given laser source by using diffraction grating
8. Study of variation of magnetic field along a circular current carrying conductor – Stewart & Gee
apparatus.
9. Determine the radius of curvature of given convex lens by forming Newton‘s rings
10. To calibrate a thermistor using a thermometer and using the calibrated thermistor as
temperature sensor find the melting point of a given chemical compound
11. To measure the value of Planck‘ s constant ‗h‘
12. To study Hall effect in extrinsic semiconducting samples and determine the type of Semiconductor
and density of majority charge carriers

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 54


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

LABORATORY MANUAL:
1. Laboratory Manual of Engineering Physics by Dr.Y.Aparna & Dr.K.Venkateswara Rao (V.G.S
Publishers)
2. Solar photovoltaics – Technology Fundamentals system: A manual for Technics, Trainers &
Engineers 2013

PART-B
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB

Course Overview:
Although engineers are not expected to carry out chemical analysis by themselves it is absolutely
essential for them to have appreciation regarding the principles, applications, merits and limitations of
the modern techniques of instrumental chemical analysis. The objective of few instrumental
techniques, namely, pH metry, potentiometry, conductometry is to inculcate the knowledge of
engineering chemistry discipline. The experiments on ion selective electrodes are proved to be vital in
engineering applications on industrial level.

Course Objectives:
I. Determination of strength of a solution Conductometrically.
II. Determination of strength of a solution Potentiometrically
III. Determination of Hardness of water.
IV. Determination of Surface Tension and Viscosity of liquids.
V. Synthesis of organic compound.

Course Outcomes:
Up on successful completion of this course, student will be able to:
1. Understand the advantages of Conductometry and Potentiometry.
2. Handle sophisticated instruments, to interpret the results and to calculate
other parameters.
3. Correlate the impurities with hardness of water.
4. Analyze the importance of temperature for Viscosity and Surface Tension.
5. Know to maintain different reaction conditions to get maximum yield.

List of Experiments:

INSTRUMENTAL METHODS:

1. Conductometry:
a. Estimation of Strong Acid by Conductometric.
b. Estimation of mixture of acids by Conductometric.

2. Potentiometry:
a. Potentiometric titration of strong acid Vs strong base.
b. Potentiometric titration of weak acid Vs strong base.
3. COMPLEXOMETRY:
a. Estimation of hardness of water by Complexo metric method using EDTA.
4. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES:
a. Determination of viscosity of sample oil by Ostwald‘s viscometer
b. Determination Surface Tension of lubricants
5. ORGANIC SYNTHESIS:
a. Preparation of a Pure Sample of Aspirin
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
1. Preparation of Thiokol rubber

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 55


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ADVANCED ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

I B.Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME04 1 1 3 3

Course Overview:
Advanced study of auxiliary views and sectioning, gears and cams, threads and fasteners, working
drawings, assembly drawings, electronic drafting, ANSI drafting standards, and computer-aided
drawing and design. Engineering design project.

Course Objectives
I. To draw and interpret various projections of 1D, 2D and 3D objects.
II. To prepare and interpret the drawings.
III. Hand on training in Solid Edge.

Course Outcomes
1. Will be in a position to convert vision / imagination into reality
2. Acquires knowledge of scaling
3. Can develop plan an elevation of geometrical objects.
4. Can produce development of surfaces.
5. Draw isometric projection of objects

SYLLABUS
UNIT- I
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING: Generation of points, lines, curves, polygons,
simple solids, dimensioning.
WORKING WITH ADVANCED DRAWING OPTIONS: Drawing Multilines, Editing Multilines using
Grids & dialog Box, creating NURBS, editing Splines.
GROUPING AND ADVANCED EDITING OF SKETCHED OBJECTS: Selecting groups, Editing
polylines
LAYERS: Concept of layers, working with layers, creating, display, locking, unlocking, and delete
commands, Coordinate system in AutoCAD, UCS, WCS, MCS.

UNIT- II
DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES OF SOLIDS: Theory of development, methods of development,
development of lateral surface along with base, reverse development.
SECTIONS AND INTERSECTIONS OF SOLIDS: Sections of commonly used simple solids,
Intersection of plane versus plane, Intersection of surfaces of two solids, Inter penetration of two
solids.

UNIT -III
ISOMETRIC DRAWINGS: Divisions of pictorial projection, divisions of Axonometric projection, theory
of Isometric Drawing, Isometric view and Isometric drawing, Isometric projections, Drawing Isometric
circles, Dimensioning Isometric Objects, conversion of Isometric view to Orthographic views

UNIT- IV
3D MODELING: Types of 3D models, 3D Coordinate Systems, basic commands in 3D, creating 3D
polylines, 3DMESH command, PEDIT command.
CREATING SOLID MODELS- creating pre-defined Solid Primitives, creating complex solid models by
applying Boolean operation, Dynamic UCS , methods of creating solids by - Extrude, Revolve, Swept,
Loft, & Presspull, , in 3Dcreating solid models, Dynamic UCS.
MODIFYING 3D OBJECTS- Fillet, Chamfer, Rotate, Mirror, Array, Slicing solid Models.
Editing 3D Objects-SOLVIEW, SOLDRAW, SOLPROF, FLATSHOT.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 56


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT- V
ADDITIONAL AUTOCAD FEATURES: Calculating the Mass Properties of Solid Models, Rendering-
creating New Materials, Modifying Material, Mapping Materials on Objects, Creating Animation, CAD
data exchange formats, Accessing External Database, Script Files and Slide Shows, Customizing the
ACAD.PGP File, Introduction to Auto LISP.

TEXT BOOKS
1. D.M. Kulkarni,A.P.Rastogi,A.K. Sarka ―Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD‖ PHI publications, 2013
2. N. D. Butt, Engineering Drawing Charotar publishing house Pvt. Ltd. 5th edition 2011

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sham Tickoo, D. saravanan, ―AutoCAD 2010 for engineers and designers‖ Dreamtech Press, 2010
2. Sham Tickoo ― AutoCAD 2011: A Problem solving approach‖ Autodesk Press, USA
3. K. Venugopal, ―Engineering Drawing+ Graphics+AutoCAD‖ New Age International.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 57


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

WORKSHOP PRACTICES
1)2
I B.Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME07 - - 3 2
PART-A
IT WORKSHOP
Any six experiments with minimum one experiment from each section to be performed.

Course Overview
Identifying Computer peripherals and its functions, Assembling and Disassembling of PC, individually
install MS Windows on the personal computer, Orientation & Connectivity Boot Camp.

Course Objectives
I. To understand the need of PC Hardware,internet & World wide web and office suites
II. To be able to use different software
III. Will show understanding about the neeed of PC hardware, internet & World wide web and
office suites
IV. Will be able to install and use different software likw windows XP,Linux,MS Office suit
component.
Course Outcomes
1. Students are able to assembling and disassembling of pc
2. Students are able to how to access the websites and email. If there is no internet connectivity
preparations need to be made by the instructors to simulate the WWW on the LAN.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. PC Hardware:
Task 1 --- Identifying Computer peripherals and its functions.
Task 2 ---Assembling and Disassembling of PC
1. Make comparative study of motherboards.
2. Observe and study various cables and connectors.
3. Study various cards used in a system viz. LAN card, Network Interface Card etc.
4. Study on various drives viz. CD Drive, Floppy Drive.
5. Study on hard disk viz.SSD,HDD.
6. To remove, study and replace CD ROM drive.
7. To Study on various types of printers viz. Dot Matrix, Laser, InkJet,etc.
8. To study parts of keyboard and mouse.
9. To assemble a PC.

Task---3:Every Student should individually install MS Windows on the personal computer. Lab
Instructor should verify the installation and follow it up with a VIVA.

Task ---4: Every student should install Linux on a computer. That computer should have
windows installed. The system should be configured as dual boot with both Windows and
Linux. Lab Instructor should verify the installation and follow it up with a VIVA.

2. Internet & World Wide Web:


Task 5- Orientation & Connectivity Boot Camp: Students should get connected to their Local
Area Network and access the Internet. In the process they configure the TCP/IP setting.
Finally students should demonstrate, to the instructor, how to access the websites and email.
If there is no internet connectivity preparations need to be made by the instructors to simulate
the WWW on the LAN.
Task 6 - Web Browsers, Surfing the Web: Students customize their web browsers with the
LAN proxy settings, bookmarks, search toolbars and pop up blockers. Also, plug-ins like
Macromedia Flash and JRE for applets should be configured.
Task 7 - Search Engines & Netiquette: Students should know what search engines are and
how to use the search engines. A few topics would be given to the students for which they
need to search on Google. This should be demonstrated to the instructors.
Task 8 - Cyber Hygiene: Students would be exposed to the various threats on the internet
and would be asked to configure their computer to be safe on the internet. They need to first

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 58


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

install an antivirus software, configure their personal firewall and windows update on their
computer. Then they need to customize their browsers to block pop ups, block active x
downloads to avoid viruses and/or worms.

3. MICROSOFT OFFICE
MS Word
Task 9 and 10 – Word Orientation: Word– Accessing, overview of toolbars, saving files, Using
help and resources, rulers, format painter in word, Formatting Fonts in word, Drop Cap in
word, Applying Text effects, Using Character Spacing, Borders and Colors, Inserting Header
and Footer, Using Date and Time option in both and Word, Formatting Styles, Inserting table,
Bullets and Numbering, Changing Text Direction, Cell alignment, Footnote, Hyperlink,
Symbols, Spell Check , Track Changes , Table of Content, Newspaper columns, Images from
files and clipart, Drawing toolbar and Word Art, Formatting Images, Textboxes and
Paragraphs, Forms, Text Fields, Inserting objects, Mail Merge in Word.

MS Excel
Task 11 and 12 - Excel Orientation : Excel –Accessing, overview of toolbars, saving excel
files, Using help and resources, Gridlines, Format Cells, Summation, auto fill, Formatting Text,
Cell Referencing, Formulae in excel
– average, standard deviation, Charts, Renaming and Inserting worksheets, Hyper linking,
Count function, LOOKUP/VLOOKUP, Split cells, freeze panes, group and outline, Sorting,
Boolean and logical operators, Conditional formatting, Pivot Tables, Interactive Buttons,
Importing Data, Data Protection, Data Validation

MS Power Point
Task 13 and 14 - PPT Orientation, Slide Layouts, Inserting Text, Word Art, Formatting Text,
Bullets and Numbering, Auto Shapes, Lines and Arrows, Hyperlinks, Inserting –Images, Clip
Art, Audio, Video, Objects, Tables and Charts, Master Layouts (slide, template, and notes),
Types of views (basic, presentation, slide slotter, notes etc), Inserting – Background, textures,
Design Templates, Hidden slides, Auto content wizard, Slide Transition, Custom Animation,
Auto Rehearsing.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Vikas Gupta (2008), Comdex Hardware and Networking Course Kit, DreamTech press, New
Delhi, India.
th
2. Sumitabha Das (2008), UNIX concepts and applications, 4 Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 59


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART-B
ENGINEERING WORKSHOP

At least two exercise from each trade to be performed


Course Overview

Workshop forms not an indispensible part of any industry. An engineer working in field must have
thorough knowledge of various tools, machines, devices used in engineering practice for creating
objects from material. The students of engineering discipline must be conversant with the various
operations performed on materials for producing desired shapes with comprehensive knowledge of
working principles of machine tools, use of tools and devices with their effective use and application.
Basic Workshop Practice is a practical subject which emphasizes on laying basic foundation for an
engineering student.

Course Objectives
I. To impart knowledge to students to develop their technical skill sets for creating entities from raw
material.
II. To give ―hands on‖ training and practice to students for use of various tools, devices, machines. III.
To develop ability of students to understand, plan and implement various processes and
operations to be performed on the raw material to create object of desired shape and size.
IV. To give exposure to inter disciplinary domains.

Course Outcomes
1. Thorough knowledge of various tools, machines, devices used in engineering practice for
creating objects from material.
2. Thorough knowledge of carrying out various operations in basic engineering shops.
3. Ability of interpretation of job drawing, application of processes and operations to produce basic
components from raw material.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. TRADES FOR EXERCISES:
Week -1: Carpentry exercises-1
Week-2: Carpentry exercises-2
Week-3: Fitting exercises-1
Week-4: Fitting exercises-2
Week-5: House wiring exercises-1 and exercises-
2 Week-6: Tin smithy exercises-1 and exercises-2
Week-7: Foundry exercises-1 and exercises-2

2. DEMONSTRATION TRADES:
a. Black Smithy
b. Welding
c. Plumbing

TEXT BOOKS
1. H. S. Bawa (2007), Workshop Practice, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New
Delhi.
2. A. Rajendra Prasad, P. M. M. S. Sarma (2002), Workshop Practice, Sree Sai Publication, New
Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. K. Jeyachandran, S. Natarajan, S. Balasubramanian (2007), A Primer on Engineering Practices
Laboratory, Anuradha Publications, New Delhi.
2. T. Jeyapoovan, M. Saravanapandian, S. Pranitha (2006), Engineering Practices Lab Manual,
Vikas Publishing House Private Limited, New Delhi.
3. Workshop Technology,Hajra Chowdary

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 60


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

TECHNICAL SEMINAR
AND
COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS (FOSS)
MANDATORY NON-CREDIT COURSE
I B.Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS18 - - 2 -

Course Objective
Seminar is an important component of learning in an Engineering College, where the student
gets acquainted with preparing a report & presentation on a topic.

PERIODICITY / FREQUENCY OF EVALUATION : Twice

PARAMETERS OF EVALUATION:
1. The seminar shall have topic allotted and approved by the faculty.
2. The seminar is evaluated for 25 marks for internal and 25 marks for external.
3. The students shall be required to submit the rough drafts of the seminar outputs within
one week of the commencement of the class work.
4. Faculty shall make suggestions for modification in the rough draft. The final draft shall be
presented by the student within a week thereafter.
5. Presentation schedules will be prepared by Department in line with the academic calendar.

The Seminars shall be evaluated in two stages as follows:

B. Rough draft

In this stage, the student should collect information from various sources on the topic and
collate them in a systematic manner. He/ She may take the help of the concerned faculty.

The report should be typed in ―MS-Word‖ file with ―calibri‖ font, with font size of 16 for main
heading, 14 for sub-headings and 11 for the body text. The contents should also be arranged
in Power Point Presentation with relevant diagrams, pictures and illustrations. It should
normally contain 10 to 15 slides, consisting of the followings:

1. Topic, name of the student & faculty 1 Slide


2. List of contents 1 Slide
3. Introduction 1Slide
4. Descriptions of the topic (point-wise) 6 - 10 Slides
5. Conclusion 1 - 2 Slides
6. References/Bibliography 1 Slide

The soft copy of the rough draft of the seminar presentation in MS Power Point format along
with the draft report should be submitted to the concerned faculty, with a copy to the
concerned HOD within stipulated time.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 61


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

The evaluation of the rough draft shall generally be based upon the following.

1 Punctuality in submission of rough draft 2


2 Dress Code 3
3 Resources from which the seminar have been based 2
4 Report , and content of Presentation 5
5 Depth of the students knowledge in the subject 5
6 Reception from Questions 5
7 Time Management, Classroom Dynamic 3
Total Marks 25

After evaluation of the first draft the supervisor shall suggest further reading, additional work
and fine tuning, to improve the quality of the seminar work.

Within 7 days of the submission of the rough draft, the students are to submit the final draft
incorporating the suggestions made by the faculty.

C. Presentation: (External )

After finalization of the final draft, the students shall be allotted dates for presentation (in the
designated seminar classes) and they shall then present it in presence students, HOD,
Incharge, faculties of the department and at least one faculty from some department / other
department.

The student shall submit 3 copies of the Report neatly bound along with 2 soft copies of the
PPT in DVD medium. The students shall also distribute the title and abstract of the seminar in
hard copy to the audience. The final presentation has to be delivered with 18-25 slides.

The evaluation of the Presentation shall generally be based upon the following.

1. Contents 10 Marks
2. Delivery 10 Marks
3. Relevance and interest the topic creates 10 Marks
4. Ability to involve the spectators 10 Marks
5. Question answer session 10 Marks
Total 50 Marks

5. WHO WILL EVALUATE?


The presentation of the seminar topics shall be made before an internal evaluation committee
comprising the Head of the Department or his/her nominee, seminar supervisor and a senior faculty of
the department / other department

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 62


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS (FOSS)

Pre Requisites: No Pre Requisites, Foundation course

Objectives:

• The aim of this lab is to develop programming skills in C/MATLAB for the numerical methods
& allied problems. More emphasis will be on writing programs with minimum possible code.

OUTCOMES:

• After completion of this lab course, student will be well acquainted with the programming skills
in C/MATLAB and able to write the codes for the problems they come across in engineering
courses.

UNIT- 1: Interpolation

Programming Tasks:

1. A) Write a programto determine yfor a given x,if two arrays of x and y of same size are given.
(Using Newton‘s interpolation both forward and backward).
B) Write a programto determine yfor a given x,if two arrays of x and y of same size are
given. (Using Lagrange‘s interpolation).
C) Write a programto determine yfor a given x,if two arrays of x and y of same size are given.
(UsingGauss interpolation).
(Selection criteria of the interpolation formula are important).
UNIT -2: Curve Fitting

Programming Tasks:

2. A) Write a program to find a line of best fit from the given two arrays of x and y of same size.
bx
B) Write a program to find a curve of the form y= A e from the given two arrays of x and y
of same size.
b
C) Write a program to find a curve of the form y=Ax the given two arrays of x and y of same
Size.
2
D) Write a program to find a curve of the form y= Ax + Bx+ C the given two arrays of x and y of
sameSize.

UNIT -3: Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations

Programming Tasks:

3. A) Write a program to find the root of a given equation using bisection method.(Write this
program such that the initial values given to the system are not usable, then the system
should ask us to give new set of initial values).
B) Write a program to find the root of a given equation using method of false
position.(Regula false position).
C) Write a program to find the root of a given equation using iteration method.
D) Write a program to find the root of a given equation using Newton Raphson method.

UNIT-4: Linear system of equations


Programming Tasks:

4. A) Write a program to find the solution of given system of linear equations using L-
U decomposition method.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 63


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

B) Write a program to find the solution of given system of linear equations using
Jacobi‘s method.
C) Write a program to find the solution of given system of linear equations using Gauss siedel
iteration method.
D) Write a program to find the solution of given system of linear equations using Gauss Jordan
elimination method.
UNIT-5: NumericalDifferentiation, Integration and Numerical solutions of First order differential
Equations

Programming Tasks:
rd
5. A)Write a program to evaluate definite integral using trapezoidal rule, Simpsons 1/3 rule and
th
3/8 rule.
B) Write a program to solve to given differential equation using Taylor‘s series.
C) Write a program to solve to given differential equation using Euler‘s and modified Euler‘s
method.
D) Write a program to solve to given differential equation using Runge-Kutta method.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Introductory Methods Of Numerical Analysis By Ss Sastry
2. Numericaland Statistical Methods With Programming In C By Sujatha Sinha And Subhabadra
Dinda, Scitec Publishers.
3. Numerical Methods,Principles, Analysis And Algorithms By Srimantapal & Subodh Bhunia,
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics By Alan Jeffery.


2. Applied Numerical Methods Using Matlab By Rao.V.Dukkipati, New Age Publishers.
3. Numerical Methods In Science And Engineering-A Practical Approach By S.Rajasekharan, S.
Chand Publications.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 64


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

II B.TECH I SEMESTER
SYLLABUS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 65


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PROBABILITY THEORY AND COMPLEX ANALYSIS

II B.Tech. – I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2HS04 3 - - 3

Course Overview:

This course focus on basic areas of theory and more advanced Engineering Mathematics topics
which provide students with the relevant mathematical tools required in the analysis of problems in
Engineering and scientific professions. The topics covered include Functions of a complex
variable, Complex Integration, Complex power series, Contour Integration, Conformal mapping,
Random variables distribution. The mathematical skills derived from this course form a necessary
base to analytical and design concepts encountered in the program

Prerequisite(s):

• Knowledge of Complex numbers, Permutations and combinations


Course Objectives:
I. Explain fundamental concepts of Probability theory.
II. Develop an understanding of the role of distributions in engineering.

III. Differentiation and Integration of complex valued functions.


IV. Evaluation of integrals using Cauchy‘s integral formula and Taylor‘s series, Maclaurin‘s
series
And Laurent‘s series expansions of complex functions.
V. Evaluation of integrals using residue theorem.
VI. Express a line integral as a double integral and vice-versa.

Course Outcomes:

After completing this course, the student will be able to:


4. An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering as appropriate
to the field of electronics communication engineering practice.
5. Specify Random variables discrete and continuous distribution.
6. Understand concept of limit, continuity differentiability and analyticity.
7. Calculate line integrals along piece wise smooth paths, interpret such quantities as
work done bya force.
8. Calculate series solution by using Taylors and Maclaurin‘s series.
9. Evaluate Residues by Laurent series
10. Participate and succeed in competitive examinations like GATE, GRE.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 66


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT –I
RANDOM VARIABLES DISTRIBUTION:
Random variables. Discrete distribution – continuous distribution. Binomial distribution - Poisson
distribution – Normal distribution - Related properties. Normal Approximation to binomial distribution.
CORRELATION & REGRESSION:
Coefficient of correlation, Rank correlation, Regression Coefficient and lines of Regression and
multiple correlation and Regression.
UNIT – II
MULTIPLE RANDOM VARIABLES, SAMPLING DISTRIBUTIONS:
Joint probability distributions- Joint probability mass /density function, Marginal probability mass /
density functions, Moment generating functions of the above three distributions, and hence finding the
mean and variance. Sampling: Definitions of population, sampling, statistic, parameter. Types of
sampling, Expected values of Sample mean and variance, sampling distribution, Standard error,
Sampling distribution of means and sampling distribution of variance

UNIT –III
FUNCTIONS OF COMPLEX VARIABLES:
Complex functions and its representation on Argand plane, Concepts of limit Continuity ,
Differentiability, Analyticity and Cauchy-Riemann conditions, Harmonic functions- Milne-
Thompson method
-Elementary functions.

UNIT – IV
COMPLEX INTEGRATION: Line integral-Evaluation along a path and by indefinite integration-
Cauchy‘s integral theorem- Cauchy‘s integral formula -Generalized integral formula.
COMPLEX POWER SERIES: Radius of convergence-expansion in Taylor‘s series - Maclaurin‘s
series and Laurent series - Singular point - Isolated singular point-pole of order m - essential
singularity.

UNIT – V
CONTOUR INTEGRATION:
Residue- Evaluation of residue by formula and by Laurent‘s Series- Residue Theorem. Evaluation
of integrals of the type
+∞ c+2π

(a) Improper real integral ∫ f (x)dx (b) ∫ f (cosθ,sinθ)dθ


−∞ c
TEXT BOOKS:
Probability and Statistics for Engineers by Richard Arnold Johnson, Irwin Miller and John E.
Freund, New Delhi, Prentice Hall
Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Sciences by Jay L. Devore, Cengage Learning
Fundamentals of Complex Analysis by Staff, E.B. and A.D. Snider, Pearson
A first course in complex analysis with applications by Dennis G. Zill and Patrick
Shanahan, Johns and Bartlett Publishers

REFERENCE BOOKS:
Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists by Sheldon M. Ross,
Academic Press

Fundamentals of Complex Analysis by saff, E. B. and A. D. Snider, Pearson


Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Louis C. Barrett, McGraw Hill

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 67


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MECHANICS OF SOLIDS
(Common to ME & AE)

II B.Tech. I Semester LTP C


CourseCode: A2ME08 3 1 - 3

Course Overview

The study of Mechanics of solids often refers to various methods of calculating the stresses and
strains in structural members, such as beams, columns, and shafts. The methods employed to predict
the response of a structure under loading and its susceptibility to various failure modes takes into
account the properties of the materials such as its yield strength, ultimate strength, Young's
modulus, and Poisson's ratio. The stresses and strains that are develop within a mechanical member
must be calculated in order to assess the load capacity of that member. This requires a complete
description of the geometry of the member, its constraints, the loads applied to the member and the
properties of the material of which the member is composed.
Course Educational Objectives

The objective is to learn the fundamental concepts of stress, strain, and deformation of solids with
applications to bars, beams, and columns. Detailed study of engineering properties of materials is also
of interest. Fundamentals of applying equilibrium, compatibility, and force-deformation relationships to
structural elements are emphasized. The students are introduced to advanced concepts of flexibility
and stiffness method of structural analysis. The course builds on the fundamental concepts of
engineering mechanics course .The students will:
This course will advance the students‘ development of the following broad capabilities:

1. Students will be able to understand basic concepts of stress, strain and their relations based on
linear elasticity. Material behaviors due to different types of loading will be discussed.
2. Students will be able to understand and know how to calculate stresses and deformation of a bar
due to an axial loading under uniform and non-uniform conditions.
3. Students will understand how to develop shear-moment diagrams of a beam and find the
maximum moment/shear and their locations
4. Students will understand how to calculate normal and shear stresses

Course Outcomes

1. Analyze the behavior of the solid bodies subjected to various types of loading;
2. Apply knowledge of materials and structural elements to the analysis of simple structures;
3. Undertake problem identification, formulation and solution using a range of analytical
methods;
4. Analyze and interpret laboratory data relating to behavior of structures and the materials
they are made of, and undertake associated laboratory work individually and in teams.
5. Expectation and capacity to undertake lifelong learning

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 68


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I

SIMPLE STRESSES AND STRAINS: Elasticity and plasticity, Types of stresses and strains, Hooke‘s
law stress, strain diagram for mild steel, Working stress, Factor of safety, Lateral strain, Poisson‘s
ratio and volumetric strain, Elastic module and the relationship between them, Bars of varying section,
composite bars, Temperature stresses. Strain energy, Resilience - Gradual, Sudden, Impact and
Shock loadings.
UNIT - II

SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT: Definition of beam, Types of beams, Concept of shear
force and bending moment, Relation between Shear Force and Bending Moment. and rate of loading
at a section of a beam. Shear Force and Bending Moment diagrams for cantilever simply supported
and overhanging beams subjected to point loads, U.D.L., uniformly varying loads and combination of
these loads, Point of contra flexure.

UNIT - III

FLEXURAL STRESSES: Theory of simple bending, Assumptions, Derivation of bending equation: M/


I = f/y = E/R Neutral axis, Determination bending stresses, section modulus of rectangular and circular
sections (Solid and Hollow), I, T, Angle and Channel sections, Design of simple beam sections.

SHEAR STRESSES: Derivation of formula, Shear stress distribution across various beams sections
like rectangular, circular, I, T, angle sections.
UNIT - IV

PRINCIPAL STRESSES AND STRAINS: Introduction - Stresses on an inclined section of a bar


under axial loading - compound stresses - Normal and tangential stresses on an inclined plane for
biaxial stresses - Two perpendicular normal stresses accompanied by a state of simple shear - Mohr's
circle of stresses - Principle stresses and strains - Analytical and graphical solutions.
DEFLECTION OF BEAMS: Bending into a circular arc slope, deflection and radius of curvature,
Differential equation for the elastic line of a beam, Double integration and Macaulay‘s methods,
Determination of slope and deflection for cantilever and simply supported beams subjected to point
loads.
UNIT - V

TORSION OF CIRCULAR SHAFTS: Theory of pure torsion - derivation of Torsion eqautions: T/J =
q/r = N/L - Assumptions made in the theory of pure torsion - Torsional moment of resistence - Polar
section modulus - Power transmitted by shafts
THIN CYLINDERS: Thin seamless cylindrical shells, Derivation of formula for longitudinal and
circumferential stresses hoop, longitudinal and volumetric strains, changes in dia, and volume of thin
cylinders, Riveted boiler shells, Thin spherical shells.
TEXT BOOKS
th
1. Ramamrutham. S (2012), Strength of materials, 17 edition, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New
Delhi, India. rd
2. Timoshenko. S (2004), Strength of materials, 3 edition, CBS Publishers, New Delhi, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS
rd
1. Ryder G. H (2007), Strength of materials, 3 edition, Macmillan, New Delhi, India.
rd
2. Bhavikathi S. S (2008), Strength of materials, 3 edition, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, India.
th
3. Dr.Bansal R.K(2007), Strength of materials, 10 edition,Laxmi Publications,Hyderabad

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 69


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

FLUID MECHANICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINERY

IIB.Tech.–ISemester LTPC
Course Code::A2ME09 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
The aim of this course is to introduce basic principles of fluid mechanics and it is further extended to
cover the application of fluid mechanics by the inclusion of fluid machinery. Nowadays the principles
of fluid mechanics find wide applications in many situations. The course deals with the fluid
machinery, like turbines, pumps in general and in power stations. This course also deals with the large
variety of fluids such as air, water, steam, etc; however the major emphasis is given for the study of
water

Course Objectives
The objectives of the course are to enable the student;
I. To understand the basic principles of fluid mechanics
II. To identify various types of flows
III. To understand boundary layer concepts and flow through pipes
IV. To evaluate the performance of hydraulic turbines
V. To understand the functioning and characteristic curves of pumps

Course Outcomes

1. Able to explain the effect of fluid properties on a flow system.


2. Able to identify type of fluid flow patterns and describe continuity equation.
3. To analyze a variety of practical fluid flow and measuring devices and utilize
fluid mechanics principles in design.
4. To select and analyze an appropriate turbine with reference to given situation in power
plants.
5. To estimate performance parameters of a given Centrifugal and Reciprocating pump.
6. Able to demonstrate boundary layer concepts.

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLUID STATICS: Density, Specific weight, Specific gravity, viscosity,
Vapour pressure, compressibility, Surface tension Pressure at a point, Pascal‘s law, pressure
variation with temperature, density and altitude. Hydro static law, Piezometer, Simple and differential
manometers, pressure gauges, total pressure and center of pressure plane, vertical and inclined
surfaces. Buoyancy and stability of floating bodies.

UNIT - II
FLUID KINEMATICS : Stream line, path line, streak line, stream tube, classification of flows, steady,
unsteady, uniform, non-uniform, laminar, turbulent, rotational, irrotational flows, one, two and three
dimensional flows, Continuity equation in 3D flow, stream function, velocity potential function.
FLUID DYNAMICS: Surface and Body forces, Euler‘s and Bernoulli‘s equation derivation, Navier
stokes equation (explanation only), Momentum equation - applications, Vortex Free and Forced.
Forced vortex with free surface.

UNIT - III
SIMILITUDE AND FLOW MEASUREMENT: Flow through venturimeter and orifice meter, flow
through notches and weirs Viscometers hot weir anenomometers, pitot tube flow through nozzles,
Characteristics of real fluids.
REYNOLDS EXPERIMENT: Darcy‘s equation, Minor losses - pipes in series, pipes in parallel, total
energy line and hydraulic gradient line, numerical problems.
BOUNDARY LAYER CONCEPTS: Definition, thicknesses, characteristics along thin plate, laminar
and turbulent layers (No Derivation) boundary layer in transition, separation of boundary layer
submerged objects drag and lift.

UNIT - IV

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 70


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

IMPACT OF WATER JETS: Hydrodynamic force of jets on stationary and moving striking centrally
and a tip-velocity triangles at inlet and outlet expressions for work done and efficiency , angular
momentum principle, applications to radial flow turbines, Jet propulsion of ships.
HYDRAULIC TURBINES: Overshot and undershot water wheels, classification of Water turbines,
Pelton Wheel, work done and working proportions, Francis, Kalpan and propeller turbines, work done
and working proportions, draft tubes, types.
PERFORMANCE OF TURBINES: Performance under unit head, unit quantities, performance under
specific conditions, specific speed, performance characteristic curves, model testing of turbines,
cavitation governing of turbines, surge tanks. Water hammer.

UNIT - V
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS : Types Component parts and working, work done by the impeller,
Manometric head losses and efficiencies, effect of vane angle on manometric efficiency, effect of finite
number of vanes of the impeller on head on efficiency, minimum starting speed, loss of head due to
reduced or increased flow, diameters of impeller and pipes.

RECIPROCATING PUMPS: Main components and working of a reciprocating pump, types of


reciprocating pumps, power required driving the pump, coefficient of discharge and slipping indicator
diagram, effect of acceleration head in suction and delivery pipes, effect of friction, maximum vacuum
pressure, work saved by air vessels, rate of flow into and from air vessels, pump duty.

TEXT BOOKS
1. P. N. Modi, S. M. Seth (2011), Hydraulics and fluid mechanics including hydraulic machines,
th
18 revised edition Standard Book House, India.
nd
2. Yumus A. Cengel, John M. Cimbala (2010), Fluid Mechanics (SI Units), 2 edition, Tata
McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
th
1. R. K. Bansal (2011), A Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, 10 edition,
Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, India.
th
2. Frank M. White (2011), Fluid Mechanics, 7 edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, India.
th
3. John F. Dauglas (2005), Fluid Mechanics, 5 edition, Pearson Education Limited, New Delhi,
India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 71


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

THERMODYNAMICS
II B.Tech. – I Semester LTP C
Course Code: A2ME10 3 1- 3

Course Overview
Thermodynamics is the field of physics that deals with the relationship between heat and work in a
substance during a thermodynamic process. Specifically, thermodynamics focuses largely on how a
heat transfer is related to various energy changes within a physical system undergoing a
thermodynamic process. Such processes usually result in work being done by the system and are
guided by the laws of thermodynamics.viz Laws of Thermodynamics: Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics-
Two systems each in thermal equilibrium with a third system are in thermal equilibrium to each other.
First Law of Thermodynamics - The change in the energy of a system is the amount of energy added
to the system minus the energy spent doing work. Second Law of Thermodynamics - It is impossible
for a process to have as its sole result the transfer of heat from a cooler body to a hotter one. Third
Law of Thermodynamics - It is impossible to reduce any system to absolute zero in a finite series of
operations. This means that a perfectly efficient heat engine cannot be created. Power cycles and
refrigeration cycle based on thermodynamic system is studied.

Course Objectives
I. To get the basic concepts of thermodynamics, temperature measurement ,first law and
also ability to determine the heat , work in various flow & non-flow processes.
II. To gain the knowledge about second law of thermodynamics and determine the change in
entropy, availability in various processes.
III. To get the knowledge various phases of pure substance and calculate its properties using
steam tables and to determine properties of perfect gases in various processes.
IV. To develop to learn the concepts of mixture of gases and to calculate the property values
during a any process.
V. To get the knowledge about the working of different types of cycles and their performance.

Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate knowledge of energy transfer and work done and heat equation in different
processes,
2. power cycles and thermodynamic laws.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of ability to identify & apply fundamentals to solve problems like
system
4. properties, amount of work transfer and heat during various processes, steam properties at
different temperatures and pressures using steam tables.
5. Demonstrate their knowledge & ability to design the thermal related components in various
fields of
6. energy transfer equipments.
7. An ability to design a system, component or process to meet desired needs within realistic
constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, and safety
manufacturability and sustainability related thermal fields like I.C engines, different types of
power plants etc.
8. The ability to use modern engineering tools, software and equipment to analyze energy
transfer in
9. required applications.
10. A knowledge of impact of engineering solutions on the society and also on contemporary
issues related to different types of power cycles.
11. A recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in self education and life-long
learning.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 72


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION: Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe,
Types of Systems, Macroscopic and Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of Continuum, Thermodynamic
Equilibrium, State, Property, Process, Cycle, Reversibility, Quasi static Process, Irreversible Process,
Causes of Irreversibility, various flow and non flow process Energy in State and in Transition, Types,
th
Work and Heat, Point and Path function. Zero Law of Thermodynamics, Concept of quality of
Temperature, Principles of Thermometry, Reference Points, Const. Volume gas Thermometer,
Scales of Temperature, Ideal Gas Scale, PMMI - Joule‘s Experiments, First law of Thermodynamics,
Corollaries First law applied to a Process, applied to a flow system, Steady Flow Energy Equation.

UNIT - II
LIMITATIONS OF THE FIRST LAW: Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat pump, Parameters of
performance, Second Law of Thermodynamics, Kelvin Planck and Clausius Statements and their
Equivalence / Corollaries, PMM of Second kind, Carnot‘s principle, Carnot cycle and its specialties,
Thermodynamic scale of Temperature, Clausius Inequality, Entropy, Principle of Entropy Increase,
Availability and Irreversibility, Thermodynamic Potentials, Gibbs and Helmholtz Functions, Maxwell
Relations, Elementary Treatment of the Third Law of Thermodynamics.

UNIT - III
PURE SUBSTANCES: P-V-T- surfaces, T-S and h-s diagrams, Mollier Charts, Phase
Transformations, Triple point at critical state properties during change of phase, Dryness Fraction.
Mollier charts, Various Thermodynamic processes and energy Transfer, Steam Calorimetry.
PERFECT GAS LAWS: Equation of State, specific and Universal Gas constants, Throttling and Free
Expansion Processes, Deviations from perfect Gas Model, Vander Waals Equation of State.

UNIT - IV
MIXTURES OF PERFECT GASES: Mole Fraction, Mass friction Gravimetric and volumetric Analysis,
Dalton‘s Law of partial pressure, Avogadro‘s Laws of additive volumes, Mole fraction , Volume
fraction and partial pressure, Equivalent Gas const and Molecular Internal Energy, Enthalpy, sp.
Heats and Entropy of Mixture of perfect Gases and Vapour, Atmospheric air.

UNIT - V
POWER CYCLES: Otto, Diesel, Dual Combustion cycles, Description and representation on P-V and
T-S diagram, Thermal Efficiency, Mean Effective Pressures on Air standard basis, comparison of
Cycles. Introduction to Brayton cycle and Bell Coleman cycle.

TEXT BOOKS
rd
1. P. K. Nag (2008), Engineering Thermodynamics, 3 edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
India.
th
2. Yunus Cengel, Boles (2011), Thermodynamics - An Engineering Approach, 7 edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
st
1. J. B. Jones, R. E. Dugan (2009), Engineering Thermodynamics, 1 edition, Prentice Hall of
India Learning, New Delhi, India.
2. Y. V. C. Rao (2009), An introduction to Thermodynamics, Revised Edition, Universities Press,
Hyderabad, India.
nd
3. K. Ramakrishna (2011), Engineering Thermodynamics, 2 edition, Anuradha Publishers, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 73


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

METALLURGY AND MATERIAL SCIENCE


II B.Tech. – I Semester LTP C
Course Code: A2ME11 3 -- 3

Course Overview
The subject deals with the materials and their properties , commonly used for the manufacturing
various components in industry. The quantificational procedures of property estimations and the
study of various phase diagrams of alloy materials .The ferrous materials and Non Ferrous
materials ,their properties and applications in the industries are incorporated. The importance of
composite materials and ceramics are included.
The course is designed for the Second year first semester students. The course will provide an over
view of the study of basic knowledge of various materials and their properties , applications. The
Study of basic alloy systems formation and their phase diagrams . The strengthening mechanisms of
various alloys .
At the end of the course, the student is expected to possess knowledge in Various materials and their
properties.
Selection of materials based on their applications . Developing new materials and their testing
methods of property evaluation. Pre- requisites: Thorough knowledge of Basic Mathematics &
Physics.

Course Objectives
I. To prepare students to demonstrate basic knowledge in mathematics, science and
engineering.
II. To prepare students to excel their the ability to identify, formulate and solve mechanical
III. engineering problems.
IV. To prepare students should be capable of self-education and clearly understand the value
of life- long learning.
V. To prepare students, will be broadly educated and will have an understanding of the impact
of engineering on society and demonstrate awareness of contemporary issues.
VI. To inculcate in students, the ability to design a system to meet desired needs within
environmental,
VII. economic, political, ethical health and safety, manufacturability and management
knowledge and techniques to estimate time, resources to complete a project.

Course Outcomes

1. An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering, to understand


different materials and their properties.
2. An ability to design a system, component or process to meet desired needs within,
realistic constraints such as economic , safety, manufacturability and sustainability etc..,
while selecting a material to manufacture the designed components.
3. An ability to identify the phases and their interrelationship in different alloy systems.
4. A recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in lifelong learning with the concepts
of composite, ceramic and nano materials for practical application

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 74


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
STRUCTURE OF METALS: Crystallization and crystal systems of metals, grain and grain
boundaries, effect of grain boundaries on the properties of metal / alloys, determination of grain size.
Hall - petch equation.
CONSTITUTION OF ALLOYS: Necessity of alloying, types of solid solutions, Hume Rotherys rules,
intermediate alloy phases, and electron compounds.

UNIT - II
EQUILIBRIUM OF DIAGRAMS: Experimental methods of construction of equilibrium diagrams,
Isomorphous alloy systems, equilibrium cooling and heating of alloys, Lever rule, coring miscibility
gaps, eutectic systems, congruent melting intermediate phases, peritectic reaction. Transformations
in the solid state allotropy, eutectoid, peritectoid reactions, phase rule, relationship between
equilibrium diagrams and properties of alloys. Study of Fe-Fe3C, equilibrium phase diagram.

UNIT - III
CAST IRONS AND STEELS: Structure and properties of White Cast iron, Malleable Cast iron, grey
cast iron, Spheriodal graphite cast iron, Alloy cast irons. Classification of steels, structure and
properties of plain carbon steels, Low alloy steels, Hadfield manganese steels, tool and die steels.
HEAT TREATMENT OF ALLOYS: Effect of alloying elements on Fe-Fe3C system, Annealing,
normalizing, Hardening, TTT diagrams, tempering, Hardenability, surface hardening methods, Age
hardening treatment, Cryogenic treatment of alloys.

UNIT - IV
NON-FERROUS METALS AND ALLOYS: Structure and properties of copper and its alloys,
Aluminium and its alloys, Titanium and its alloys.
CERAMIC MATERIALS: Crystalline ceramics, glasses, cermaets, abrasive materials, nanomaterials -
definition, properties and applications of the above.

UNIT - V
COMPOSITE MATERIALS: Classification of composites, various methods of component
manufacture of composites, particle - reinforced materials, fiber reinforced materials, metal ceramic
mixtures, metal matrix composites and C - C composites.

TEXT BOOKS
th
1. V. Raghavan (2011), Material Science and Engineering: A first course, 5 edition, Prentice Hall
of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
nd
2. Sidney H. Avener (2007,) Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, 2 edition, Tata McGraw hill
education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
st
1. V. D. Kodgire (2006), Material Science and Metallurgy for engineers, 1 Edition, Everest, Pune,
India.
th
2. Pakirappa (2011), Metallurgy and Material Science, 5 Edition, DPH, Hyderabad, India.
th
3. Vanvlack, Lawrence (1998), Elements of Material Science and Engineering, 6 edition, Addison
Wesley, Massachusetts.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 75


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MACHINE DRAWING LAB


II B.Tech. – I Semester LTP C
Course Code: A2ME12 1 14 3

Course Overview
Machine Drawing gives representation of a machine component or machine by lines according to
certain set rules. Machine drawing generally gives all the external and internal details of the machine
components from which it can be manufactured. The machining symbols, tolerances, bill of material,
etc. are specified on the drawing when it is being manufactured, then it is called production drawing.

Course Objectives
I. Understand the different steps in producing drawings according to bureau of Indian standards
(B.I.S.) as per SP:46 (1988)
II. Understand the application of industry standards and techniques applied in Machine Drawing
III. Comprehend general projection theory, with an emphasis on the use of orthographic
projection to represent three-dimensional objects in two-dimensional views .

Course Outcomes
1. After going through this course, the student shall be able to understand the drawings of
mechanical components and their assemblies along with their utility for design and
development of mechanical system.
2. Work effectively with engineering and science teams as well as with multidisciplinary designs.
3. Skillfully use modern engineering tools and techniques such as CAD- CAM softwares for
mechanical engineering design, analysis and application

SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
MACHINE DRAWING CONVENTIONS
Need for drawing conventions – introduction to ISI conventions
a) Conventional representation of materials, common machine elements and parts such as
screws, nuts, bolts, keys, gears, webs, ribs.
b) Types of sections – selection of section planes and drawing of sections and auxiliary sectional
views. Parts not usually sectioned.
c) Methods of dimensioning, general rules for sizes and placement of dimensions for holes,
centers, curved and tapered features.
d) Title boxes, their size, location and details - common abbreviations and their liberal usage
e) Types of Drawings – working drawings for machine parts.

UNIT-II
DRAWING OF MACHINE ELEMENTS AND SIMPLE PARTS
Selection of Views, additional views for the following machine elements and parts with every drawing
proportions. Popular forms of Screw threads, bolts, nuts, stud bolts, tap bolts, set screws.Keys,
cottered joints and knuckle joint.

UNIT-III
Rivetted joints for plates, Shaft coupling, spigot and socket pipe joint, Journal, pivot and collar and
foot step bearings.

UNIT-IV
Drawings of assembled views for the part drawings of the following using
conventions and easy drawing proportions.
1.Engine parts – stuffing boxes, cross heads, Eccentrics, Petrol Engine connecting rod, piston
assembly.

UNIT-V
1) Other machine parts - Screws jacks, Machine Vices Plummer block, Tailstock.
2) Valves : Steam stop valve, spring loaded safety valve, feed check valve and air cock.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 76


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

NOTE :
First angle projection to be adopted. The student should be able to provide working drawings of actual
parts.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Machine Drawing –K.L.Narayana, P.Kannaiah & K.Venkata Reddy / New Age/Publishers
2. Machine Drawing – Dhawan, S.Chand Publications
3. Machine Drawing, Siddheswar

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Machine Drawing – P.S.Gill.
2. Machine Drawing – Luzzader

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 77


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING LAB

II B.Tech. – I Semester LTP C


Course Code: A2EC04 - -3 2

Course Overview
Verification of KCL and KVL, Magnetization characteristics of D.C. Shunt generator,Speed control of
DC motor,Swinburne‘s Test on DC shunt machine,Brake test on DC shunt motor,OC and SC tests on
Single-phase transformer,Brake test on 3-phase Induction motor,Regulation by an alternator by
synchronous impedance method.PN Junction Diode Characteristics (Forward bias, Reverse bias)
,Transistor CE Characteristics (Input and Output),Study of CRO,Class A Power Amplifier,Zener Diode
Characteristics, Transistor CE Characteristics, Rectifier without Filters (Full wave & Half
wave),Rectifier with Filters (Full wave & half wave).

Course objectives
I. The theoretical concepts of KVL and KCL, Diode, Transistor are verified experimentally
II. The performance of A.C and D.C machines are studied practically
III. The efficiency and regulation of Transformer are determined experimentally
IV. The fundamentals of A.C. and D.C supply are studied practically.

Course Outcomes

1. Find the difference between Generator and Motor performance characteristics


2. Find the applications of the electrical machines with the experimental determination of the
performance of the machines
3. Find the applications of the Transformers with the experimental determination of the
performance of the Transformers
4. Apply the Basic components to real time applications.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
SECTION A: ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING:
1. Verification of KCL and KVL.
2. Magnetization characteristics of D.C. Shunt generator.
3. Speed control of DC motor.
4. Swinburne‘s Test on DC shunt machine.
5. Brake test on DC shunt motor.
6. OC and SC tests on Single-phase transformer.
7. Brake test on 3-phase Induction motor.
8. Regulation by an alternator by synchronous impedance method.

SECTION B: ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING:


1. PN Junction Diode Characteristics (Forward bias, Reverse bias)
2. Transistor CE Characteristics (Input and Output)
3. Study of CRO.
4. Class A Power Amplifier
5. Zener Diode Characteristics
6. Transistor CE Characteristics
7. Rectifier without Filters (Full wave & Half wave)
8. Rectifier with Filters (Full wave & half wave).
Note: Total 12 experiments are to be conducted.
(Six experiments from PART-A, Six experiments from PART-B)

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 78


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MECHANICS OF SOLIDS LAB

II B.Tech. – I Semester LTP C


CourseCode: A2ME13 - -3 2

Course Overview
Mechanics of Solids lab deals with the experiments involving relation of externally applied loads and
its internal effect on the bodies. In general study we assume bodies and objects to be rigid but in
Mechanics of Solids lab we do consider the deformation/deflection. The lab involves analytical
methods for determining the strength, stiffness (deformation characteristics), and stability of the
various members in a structural system. The behavior of a member depends not only on the
fundamental laws that govern the equilibrium of forces, but also on the mechanical characteristics of
the material.

Course Objectives
The objective is to learn the fundamental concepts of stress, strain, and deformation of solids with
applications to bars, beams, and columns. Detailed study of engineering properties of materials is also
of interest. Fundamentals of applying equilibrium, compatibility, and force-deformation relationships to
structural elements are emphasized. The students are introduced to advanced concepts of flexibility
and stiffness method of structural analysis. The course builds on the fundamental concepts of
engineering mechanics course .

The students will advance the students‘ development of the following broad capabilities:

I. Students will be able to understand basic concepts of stress, strain and their relations based
on linear elasticity. Material behaviors due to different types of loading will be discussed.
II. Students will be able to understand and know how to calculate stresses and deformation of a
bar due to an axial loading under uniform and non-uniform conditions.
III. Students will understand how to develop shear-moment diagrams of a beam and find the
maximum moment/shear and their locations
IV. Students will understand how to calculate normal and shear stresses on any cross-section of
a beam. Different cross-sections (including I-beam) will be discussed and applied Continuous
Assessment Test 10 marks Mid Semester Test 15 marks End

Course Outcomes
1. Analyze the behavior of the solid bodies subjected to various types of loading.
2. Apply knowledge of materials and structural elements to the analysis of simple structures.
3. Undertake problem identification, formulation and solution using a range of analytical methods
4. Analyze and interpret laboratory data relating to behaviour of structures and the materials
they are made of, and undertake associated laboratory work individually and in teams.
5. Expectation and capacity to undertake lifelong learning.

SYLLABUS
MECHNICS OF SOLIDS LAB:
1. Direct tension test
2. Deflection test on Simply supported Beam.
3. Deflection test on Cantilever beam
4. Torsion test
5. Hardness test
6. Test on springs
7. Compression test on cube
8. Charpy-Impact test
9. Izod -Impact test
10. Shear test

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 79


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

GENDER SENSITIZATION
(MANDATORY NON-CREDIT COURSE)

II B.Tech. – I Semester LTPC


Course Code: A2HS17 - -3 -

Objectives of the Course

I. To develop students' sensibility with regard to issues of gender in contemporary India.


II. To provide a critical perspective on the socialization of men and women.
III. To introduce students to information about some key biological aspects of genders. IV.
To expose the students to debates on the politics and economics of work.
V. To help students reflect critically on gender violence.
VI. To expose students to more egalitarian interactions between men and women.

Learning Outcomes

1. Students will have developed a better understanding of important issues related to gender
in contemporary India.
2. Students will be sensitized to basic dimensions of the biological, sociological, psychological and
legal aspects of gender. This will be achieved through discussion of materials derived from
research, facts, everyday life, literature and film.
3. Students will attain a finer grasp of how gender discrimination works in our society and how
to counter it.
4. Students will acquire insight into the gendered division of labour and its relation to politics and
economics.
5. Men and women students and professionals will be better equipped to work and live together as
equals.
6. Students will develop a sense of appreciation of women in all walks of life,
7. Through providing accounts of studies and movements as well as the new laws that provide
protection and relief to women, the textbook will empower students to understand and respond to
gender violence.

UNIT-I
UNDERSTANDING GENDER:
Gender: Why Should We Study It? (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -1)
Socialization: Making Women, Making Men (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -2)
Introduction. Preparing for Womanhood. Growing up Male. First lessons in Caste. Different
Masculinities.
Just Relationships: Being Together as Equals (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -12)
Mary Kom and ()tiler. Love and Acid just do not Mix. Love Letters. Mothers and Fathers, Further
Reading: Rosa Parks-The Brave Heart.

UNIT — II
GENDER AND BIOLOGY:
Missing Women: Sex Selection and Its Consequences (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -4) Declining
Sex Ratio. Demographic Consequences. Gender Spectrum: Beyond the Binary (Towards a World of
Equals: Unit -10) Two or Many? Struggles with Discrimination. Additional Reading: Our Bodies, Our
Health (Towards a World of Equals:Unit -13)

UNIT — III
GENDER AND LABOUR: Housework: the Invisible Labour (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -3) "My
Mother doesn't Work." "Share the Load." Women's Work: Its Politics and Economics (Towards a
World of Equals: Unit -7)
Fact and Fiction. Unrecognized and Unaccounted work. Further Reading: Wages and Conditions of
Work.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 80


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT — IV
ISSUES OF VIOLENCE:
Sexual Harassment: Say Nol (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -6)
Sexual Harassment, not Eve-teasing- Coping with Everyday Harassment - Further Reading:
"Chupulu". Domestic Violence: Speaking Out (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -8) Is Home a Safe
Place? -When Women Unite [Film). Rebuilding Lives. Further Reading: New Forums for Justice.
Thinking about Sexual Violence (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -11) Blaming the Victim-"I Fought
for my Life...." - Further Reading: The Caste Face of Violence.

UNIT — V GENDER
STUDIES:
Knowledge: Through the Lens of Gender (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -5)
Point of View. Gender and the Structure of Knowledge. Further Reading: Unacknowledged Women
Artists o Telangana.
Whose History? Questions for Historians and Others (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -9) Reclaiming
a Past. Writing other Histories. Further Reading: Missing Pages from Modern Telangana History.

Essential Reading: All the Units in the Textbook, "Towards a World of Equals: A Bilingual Textbook
on Gender" written by A.Suneetha, Uma Bhrugubanda, Dugglrala Vasanta, Rama Melkote, Vasudha
Nagaraj, Asma Rasheed, Gogu Shyamala, Deepa Sreenivas and Susie Tharu.
Note: Since it is Interdisciplinary Course, Resource Persons can be drawn from the fields of English
Literature or Sociology or Political Science or any other qualified faculty who has expertise in this field.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Sen, Arnartya. 'More than One Million Women are Missing." New York Review of Books 37.20 (20
December 1990). Print. We Were Making History.. ' Life Stories of Women in the Telangana
People's Struggle. New Delhi: Kali for Women, 1989.
2. Tripti Lahiri. "By the Numbers: Where Indian Women Work." Women's Studies Journal (14
November 2012) Available online at: http:// blogs.wsj.com/ India real time/2012111/14/by —the-
numbers-where-Indian-women-work/>
3. K. Satyanarayana and Susie Tharu (Ed.) Steel Nibs Are Sprouting: New Dalit Writing From South
India, Dossier 2: Telugu And Kannada http://harpercollins.co.in/BookDetail.aso?Book Code=3732
4. Virnala. "Vantillu (The Kitchen)", Women Writing in India: 600 BC to the Present. Volume II: The
20th Century. Ed. Susie Tharu and K. Lalita. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1995. 599-601.
5. Shatrughna, Veena et al. Women's Work and its Impact on Child Health and Nutrition, Hyderabad,
National Institute of Nutrition, Indian Council of Medical Research. 1993.
6. Stree Shakti Sanghatana. "We Were Making History ....' Life Stories of Women in the
Telangana People's Struggle. New Delhi: Kali for Women, 1989.
7. Mernon, Nivedita. Seeing like a Feminist. New Delhi: Zubaan-Penguin Books, 2012
8. Jayaprabha, A. "Chupulu (Stares)". Women Writing in India: 6008C to the Present. Volume II: The
20th Century Ed. Susie Tharu and K. Lalita. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1995. 596-597.
9. Javeed, Shayan and Anupam Manuhaar. "Women and Wage Discrimination in India: A
Critical Analysis." International Journal of Humanities and Social Science Invention 2.4(2013)
10. Gautam, Liela and Gita Ramaswamy. "A 'conversation' between a Daughter and a Mother."
Broadsheet on Contemporary Politics. Special Issue on Sexuality and Harassment: Gender
Politics on Campus Today. Ed.
11. Madhumeeta Sinha and Asma Rasheed. Hyderabad: Anveshi Research Center for Women's
Studies, 2014.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 81


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

II B.TECH II SEMESTER
SYLLABUS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 82


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ANALYSIS

II B.Tech. – II Semester L T PC
Course Code: A2HS14 3 - - 3

Course Overview
Course is designed in such a way that it gives an overview of concepts of Economics. Managerial
Economics enables students to understand micro environment in which markets operate how price
determination is done under different kinds of competitions. Financial Analysis gives clear idea about
concepts, conventions and accounting procedures along with introducing students to fundamentals of
ratio analysis and interpretation of financial statements. Break Even Analysis is very helpful to the
Business Concern for Decision Making, controlling and forward Strategic Planning. Ratio analysis
gives an idea about financial forecasting, financial planning, controlling the business and decision
making.

Course Objectives
I. To enable the student to analyze and understanding the concepts of Managerial Economics and
Demand Analysis.
II. To provide the student with an understanding of the Elasticity of Demand and Demand Forecasting.
III. To provide the student with an understanding of the production theories, analysis and cost analysis
while dealing with the production and factors of production.
IV. To provide the student with an understanding of different market structures and price and output
determination in different market structures.
V. To give the student an understanding the features and evaluation of different forms of Business
Organisations and New Economic Environment.
VI. To enable the student with an understanding the significance of Capital and capital
Budgeting methods / Techniques.
VII. To give the student with an understanding the knowledge of financial accounting.
To enable the student to analyze and understanding the significance of financial analysis through
Ratio Analysis for Decision making, Financial forecasting, planning and controlling the business.

Course Outcomes
1. An ability to demonstrate knowledge of basic sciences, mathematical skills, engineering and
technology to solve complex electronics and communication engineering problems. (Fundamental
Knowledge of Managerial Economics concepts , Accounting concepts and Accounting
Conventions)
2. Demonstrate an ability to identify, formulate and analyze engineering problems using knowledge
of Basic Mathematics and Engineering Sciences (Accounting Problem Solving skills)
3. Demonstrate an ability to provide solution and to design Electronics and Communication Systems
as per social needs (Society Conscious Skills)
4. An ability to investigate the problems in Electronics and Communication field and develop suitable
solutions ( Creative Skills) .
5. Demonstrate an ability to use latest hardware and software tools to solve complex engineering
problems (Software & Hardware Interface)
6. An ability to apply Demonstrate knowledge of contemporary issues like health, Safety and
legal which influences engineering design (Social Awareness Skills)
7. Show the understanding on the awareness on society and environment for sustainable solutions to
Electronics and Communication Engineering problems(Social awareness skills)
8. An ability to demonstrate understanding of professional and ethical
responsibilities(Engineering impact assessment skills)

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 83


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS: Definition, Nature and Scope Managerial
Economics, Demand Analysis: Demand Determinants, Law of Demand and its exceptions.
ELASTICITY OF DEMAND: Definition, Types, Measurement and Significance of Elasticity of
Demand. Demand Forecasting, Factors governing demand forecasting, methods of demand
forecasting (survey methods, statistical methods, expert opinion method, test marketing, controlled
experiments, judgmental approach to demand forecasting).

UNIT - II
THEORY OF PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS: Production Function, Isoquants and Isocosts,
MRTS, Least Cost Combination of Inputs, Production function, Laws of Returns, Internal and External
Economies of Scale.
COST ANALYSIS: Cost concepts, Opportunity cost, fixed vs. variable costs, explicit costs vs. Implicit
costs, Out of pocket costs vs. Imputed costs. Break Even Analysis (BEA), termination of Break Even
Point (simple problems), Managerial Significance and limitations of BEA.

UNIT - III
INTRODUCTION TO MARKETS AND PRICING STRATEGIES: Market structures: Types of
competition, Features of Perfect competition, Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition.
PRICE DETERMINATION AND PRICE STATISTICS: Price-Output Determination in case of Perfect
Competition and Monopoly, Pricing Strategies.

UNIT - IV
BUSINESS AND NEW ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT: Characteristic features of Business, Features
and evaluation of Sole Proprietorship, Partnership, Joint Stock Company, Public Enterprises and their
types, Changing Business Environment in Post-liberalization scenario.
CAPITAL AND CAPITAL BUDGETING: Capital and its significance, Types of Capital, Estimation of
Fixed and Working capital requirements, Methods and sources of raising finance. Nature and scope
of capital budgeting, features of capital budgeting proposals, Methods of Capital Budgeting: Payback
Method, Accounting Rate of Return (ARR) and Net Present Value Method (simple problems).

UNIT - V
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING: Double-Entry Book Keeping, Journal, Ledger, Trial
Balance- Final Accounts (Trading Account, Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet with simple
adjustments).
FINANCIAL ANALYSIS THROUGH RATIOS: Computation, Analysis and Interpretation of Liquidity
Ratios (Current Ratio and quick ratio), Activity Ratios (Inventory turnover ratio and Debtor Turnover
ratio), Capital structure Ratios (Debt-Equity ratio, Interest Coverage ratio), and Profitability ratios
(Gross Profit Ratio, Net Profit ratio, Operating Ratio, P/E Ratio and EPS).

TEXT BOOKS
nd
1. Aryasri (2005), Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, 2 edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, India.
2. Varshney, Maheswari (2003), Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ambrish Gupta (2004), Financial Accounting for Management, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
India.
th
2. Domnick Salvatore (2011), Managerial Economics in a Global Economy, 7 edition, Oxford
University Press, United States of America.
3. Narayanaswamy (2005), Financial Accounting, A Managerial Perspective, Prentice Hall of India
private Ltd, New Delhi, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 84


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS – I

II B.Tech. – II Semester L T PC
CourseCode: A2ME14 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
This course deals the Systematic approach to design, standardization, Design and
Manufacturing, Engineering Materials, Simple Stresses and Compound Stresses in
Machine Elements, Design For Strength, strength of mechanical elements; theories of
failure under static and dynamic loading situations; impact loading, Design of Fasteners,
Design of joints, Design Of Keys and cotter joints, Shaft Couplings, Rivet Joints, Welded
Joints, Design of Springs and Shafts.

Course Objectives
I. To enhance the ability of students to apply mathematics and fundamentals of science for
design
Machine elements.
II. To develop good and careful problem formulation and solution skills for designing selected
machine components and systems.
III. To develop an ability to make proper analysis and assumptions by employing the
concepts and theories.
IV. To develop a working knowledge in the use of various standard procedures and catalog
information
in the identification and selection of engineering materials.

Course Outcomes
1. Students should be able to understand design and manufacturing considerations
2. Students should be able to understand Engineering materials and their properties, BIS
codes for steels
3. Students should be able to understand stresses in machine members
4. Students should be able to understand Fatigue loading, stress concentration,
endurance limit, theories of failure.
5. Students should be able to understand riveted joints, bolted joints, cotter, knuckle
joints, keys, couplings
6. Students should be able to understand stresses and design of shaft
7. Students should be able to understand deflections in springs.
8. Students Can participate and succeed in competitive examinations like GATE,IES

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 85


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION: General considerations. Classification of Machine Design. Steps involved in
Machine Design.
STRESSES IN MACHINE MEMBERS: Simple stresses, Combined stresses, Torsional and bending
stresses, impact stresses, stress strain relation, various theories of failure, factor of safety, Design for
strength and rigidity, preferred numbers. The concept of stiffness in tension, bending, torsion and
combined situations, Static strength design based on fracture toughness.

UNIT - II
STRENGTH OF MACHINE ELEMENTS : Stress concentration ,Theoretical stress Concentration
factor ,Fatigue stress concentration factor notch sensitivity , Design for fluctuating stresses ,
Endurance limit , Estimation of Endurance strength , Goodman‘s line , Soderberg‘s line , Modified
Goodman‘s line.

UNIT - III
RIVETED AND WELDED JOINTS: Design of joints with initial stresses, eccentric loading
BOLTED JOINTS: Design of bolts with pre-stresses, Design of joints under eccentric loading, locking
devices, both of uniform strength, different seals.

UNIT - IV
KEYS, COTTERS AND KNUCKLE JOINTS, SHAFTS: Design of Keys, stresses in keys, cottered
joints, spigot and socket, sleeve and cotter, jib and cotter joints- Knuckle joints.
SHAFTS: Design of solid and hollow shafts for strength and rigidity, Design of shafts for combined
bending and axial loads , Shaft sizes , BIS code. Use of internal and external circlips, Gaskets and
seals (stationary & rotary).

UNIT - V
SHAFT COUPLING: Rigid couplings, Muff, Split muff and Flange couplings. Flexible couplings,
Flange coupling (Modified)
MECHANICAL SPRINGS: Stresses and deflections of helical springs, Extension, compression
springs, Springs for fatigue loading, natural frequency of helical springs , Energy storage capacity
,helical torsion springs , Co-axial springs, leaf springs.

TEXT BOOKS
rd
1. V. Bandari (2011), A Text Book of Design of Machine Elements, 3 edition, Tata McGraw hill
education (P) ltd, New Delhi, India.
nd
2. R. L. Norton (2006), Machine Design (An Integrated approach), 2 edition, Pearson
Publishers, Chennai, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
th
1. Shigley, J.E, (2011), Mechanical Engineering Design, 9 Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
India.
rd
2. S. M.D. Jalaludin, (2011), Machine Design, 3 Edition, Anuradha Publishers, Kumbakonam,
Chennai, India.
nd
3. P. Kannaiah, (2012), Machine Design, 2 Edition, Scitech Publications India Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 86


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

THERMAL ENGINEERING – I
II B.Tech. – II Semester L T PC
Course Code: A2ME15 31 - 3

Course Overview
This course is intended to introduce basic principles of internal combustion engines, compressors and
refrigeration are widely used in automobile, agriculture, industry for transport, water pumping,
electricity generation, earth moving and to supply mechanical power to grinders, crushers etc.
Compressors are used for supply of gases including air at higher pressure. Compressors are used to
supply compressed air to all pneumatic equipments and for gases such as cooking gas, oxygen,
nitrogen, neon, argon compressors are also used. Thus there is great relevance for this course for
mechanical engineers.

Course Objectives
I. To introduce basic principles of operation of IC engines compressors and refrigeration
systems. II. To understand the procedures of testing and evaluating the performance of these
machines. III. To know the maintenance details and procedures.
IV. Teach students to conduct experiments in laboratories and analyze the results with
theoretical ones.

Course Outcomes
The student will be able to:
1. Understand main idea and importance behind the 2 - S and 4 - S IC engines.
2. To analyze the working of the basic components in the IC engines, Compressors
and Refrigeration systems.
3. Understand the combustion process and also how it does affect the performance of the IC
engines.
4. Apply the thermodynamic principles in the design of an IC engines, compressors
and refrigeration system.
5. Formulate and perform the procedures required for the maintenance and operation of IC
engines, compressors and refrigeration systems.
6. Compare different IC engines, compressors and refrigeration systems and develop a system
which meets the requirements.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 87


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
I.C. ENGINES: Classification, Working principles, Valve and Port Timing Diagrams.Actual Cycles
and Their Analysis:Introduction, Comparison of Air Standard and Actual Cycles, Time Loss Factor,
Heat Loss Factor, Exhaust Blowdown-Loss due to Gas exchange process, Volumetric Efficiency.
Loss due to Rubbing Friction, Actual and Fuel- Air Cycles of CI Engines.

UNIT - II
COMBUSTION IN S.I. ENGINES: Normal Combustion and abnormal combustion, Importance of
flame speed andeffect of engine variables, Type of Abnormal combustion, pre-ignition and knocking
(explanation of) Fuel requirements and fuel rating, anti knock additives, combustion chamber –
requirements, types. Combustion in C.I.Engines: Four stages of combustion, Delay period and its
importance, Effect of engine variables, Diesel Knock, Needfor air movement, open and divided
combustion chambers and nozzles used – fuel requirements and fuel rating.

UNIT - III
TESTING AND PERFORMANCE: Parameters of performance, measurement of cylinder pressure,
fuel consumption,air intake, exhaust gas composition, Brake power, Determination of frictional
losses and indicated power, Performance test, Heat balance sheet.
COMPRESSORS: Classification, positive displacement and roto dynamic machinery, Power
producing and powerabsorbing machines, fan, blower and compressor, positive displacement and
dynamic types, reciprocating and rotary types. Rotary (Positive displacement type): Roots Blower,
vane sealed compressor, mechanical details and principle of working efficiency considerations.

UNIT - IV
RECIPROCATING: Principle of operation, work required, Isothermal efficiency volumetric efficiency
and effect ofclearance, stage compression, under cooling, saving of work, minimum work condition
for stage compression.

UNIT - V
DYNAMIC COMPRESSORS: Centrifugal compressors: Mechanical details and principle of
operation, velocity andpressure variation. Energy transfer-impeller blade shape-losses, slip factor,
power input factor, pressure coefficient and adiabatic coefficient, velocity diagrams, power.
AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS: Mechanical details and principle of operation, velocity triangles
and energy transferper stage degree of reaction, work done factor, isentropic efficiency, pressure
rise calculations, polytrophic efficiency.

TEXT BOOKS
rd
1. V. Ganesan (2011), I.C. Engines, 3 edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, India.
th
2. R. K. Rajput (2011), Thermal Engineering, 18 edition, Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
rd
1. Mathur, Sharma (2008), IC Engines, 3 edition, DhanpatRai& Sons, New Delhi, India.
nd
2. Pulkrabek(2008), Engineering fundamentals of IC Engines, 2 edition, Pearson Education,
New Jersey.
th
3. Rudramoorthy(2003), Thermal Engineering, 5 edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, India.

PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 88


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

II B.Tech. – II Semester L T PC
Course Code: A2ME16 31 - 3

Course Overview
Production technology is a combination of manufacturing technology with management science. A
production engineer typically has a wide knowledge of engineering practices and is aware of the
management challenges related to production. The goal is to accomplish the production process in
the smoothest, most-judicious and most-economic way.
Production technology encompasses the application of castings, machining processing, joining
processes, metal cutting & tool design, metrology, machine tools, machining systems, automation, jigs
and fixtures, die and mould design, material science, design of automobile parts, and machine
designing and manufacturing. Production engineering also overlaps substantially with manufacturing
engineering and industrial engineering.
In industry, once the design is realized, production engineering concepts regarding work-study,
ergonomics, operation research, manufacturing management, materials management, production
planning, etc., play important roles in efficient production processes. These deal with integrated
design and efficient planning of the entire manufacturing system, which is becoming increasingly
complex with the emergence of sophisticated production methods and control systems.

Course objectives
I. To reorganization of Practical orientation of Manufacturing Processes
II. Understand the basic parameters in the foundry section to producing various metallic parts.
III. Knowledge on different kinds of Production Processes and practices available for Shaping or
Molding several daily used parts for industries.
IV. Equipment selection for various deformation Processes will be understood.
V. Understand the various methods used to producing plastic shapes.

Course Outcomes
1. An ability to contrast the different types of manufacturing process and apply the Technology
Systems Model to manufacturing identify, illustrate, solve, formulate, distinguish & compare
different working Process
2. An Ability to understand the design a system, component or process to meet desired needs within,
realistic constraints such as manufacturability ,economic ,environmental, safety & sustainability etc.,
3. An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering, to Identify, define, and
clearly state a manufacturing design problem.
4. An ability to identify, formulates, analyzes and solves Engineering Problems in Optimum time an
ability to demonstrate ability to welding and conduct experiments, analyze and interpret data.
5. An ability to use the techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering
practice with the concept of virtual work. Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in
self education and life-long learning.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 89


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
CASTING: Steps involved in making a casting, Advantage of casting and its applications. Patterns
and Pattern making, Types of patterns, Materials used for patterns, pattern allowances and their
construction, Principles of Gating, Gating ratio and design of Gating systems Solidification of casting,
Concept, Solidification of pure metal and alloys, short and long freezing range alloys. Risers Types
function and design, special casting processes 1) Centrifugal 2) Die 3) Investment.
METHODS OF MELTING: Crucible melting and cupola operation, steel making processes.

UNIT - II
WELDING: Classification of welding process types of welds and welded joints and their
characteristics, design of welded joints, Gas welding, ARC welding, Forge welding, resistance
welding, Thermit welding and Plasma (Air and water) welding.
CUTTING OF METALS: Oxy Acetylene Gas cutting, water plasma, cutting of ferrous, non-ferrous
metals.

UNIT - III
INERT GAS WELDING: TIG and MIG, welding, Friction welding, Induction welding, Explosive
welding, Laser welding, Soldering and Brazing. Heat affected zones in welding; welding defects,
causes and remedies, destructive, nondestructive testing of welds.
HOT WORKING AND COLD WORKING: Strain hardening, recovery, recrystallisation and grain
growth, Comparison of properties of cold and hot worked parts.

UNIT - IV
ROLLING: Fundamentals, theory of rolling, types of Rolling mills and Forces in rolling and power
requirements. Stamping, forming and other cold working processes: Blanking and piercing, Bending
and forming, Drawing and its types, wire drawing and Tube drawing, coining, Hot and cold spinning
Forces and power requirement in the above operations.

UNIT - V
EXTRUSION OF METALS: Basic extrusion process and its characteristics. Hot extrusion and cold
extrusion, Forward extrusion and backward extrusion, Impact extrusion, Hydrostatic extrusion.
FORGING PROCESSES: Principles of forging, Tools and dies, Types Forging, Smith forging, Drop
Forging, Roll forging, Rotary forging, forging defects.
PROCESSING OF PLASTICS: Types of Plastics, Properties, applications and their Processing
methods and Equipment (blow and injection modeling).

TEXT BOOKS
1.P. N. Rao (2011), Manufacturing Technology, Vol -1, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw- Hill education (P)
Ltd, New Delhi.
2.S. Kalpakjain (2005), Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, 4th edition, Pearson
Education, New Jersey.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. R. K. Jain (2010), Production Technology, 16th edition, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, India.
2. B. S. Raghuwanshi (2011), A course in workshop Technology, Vol - II, 3rd Edition, DhanpatRai&
Co, New Delhi, India.
3 .Gosh (2004), Manufacturing science, Affiliated East-west press (p) Ltd, New Delhi, India

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 90


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY
II B.Tech. – II Semester L T PC
Course Code: A2ME17 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
Mechanical devices are designed to have mobility to perform certain functions. The theory behind the
study of KOM leads us to design machines by understanding the relationship between the geometry
and the movement of various parts of machine. This course will provide the knowledge on how to
analise the motions of mechanisms and design mechanisms to give required movement. This includes
relative motion analysis and design of gears, gear trains, cams, linkages and steering gears by
simultaneous graphical and analytical analysis of position, velocity, and acceleration of links in a
machine.

Course Objectives
The objectives of the course are to enable the student;
I. To understand the basic principles of kinematics and the related terminology of
machines. II. Discriminate mobility; enumerate links and joints in the mechanisms.
III. Formulate the concept of analysis of different mechanisms.
IV. To understand the working of various straight line mechanisms, gears, gear trains, steering gear
mechanisms, cams and Hooke‘s joint.
V. Analyze a mechanism for displacement, velocity and acceleration of links in a machine.

Course Outcomes
On successful completion of the course, the student will be able to
1. Be familiar with different machine elements which accomplish similar results.
2. Calculate mobility and enumerate rigid links and types of joints in mechanisms.
3. Able to create a schematic drawing of real world mechanisms.
4. Able to conduct a complete translational and rotational mechanism for the velocity and acceleration
analysis.
5. Able to design mechanisms of basic cam systems for different machinery.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 91


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
MECHANISMS : Elements or Links – Classification – Rigid Link, flexible and fluid link – Types of
kinematic pairs – Types of constrained motion – kinematic chain – Mechanism -Machine-Structure -
inversion of mechanism – inversions of quadric cycle chain, single and double slider crank chains,
Mechanical Advantage – Grubler‘s Criterion.

UNIT – II
KINEMATICS: Velocity and acceleration – Motion of link in machine – Determination of Velocity and
acceleration – Graphical method – Application of relative velocity method. PLANE MOTION OF
BODY: Instantaneous center of rotation - centroids and axodes – Three centers in line theorem –
Graphical determination of instantaneous center, determination of angular velocity of points and links
by instantaneous center method. Kleins construction - Coriolis acceleration - determination of Coriolis
component of acceleration. ANALYSIS OF MECHANISMS: Analysis of slider crank chain for
displacement , velocity and acceleration of slider – Acceleration diagram for a given mechanism.

UNIT – III
STRAIGHT -LINE MOTION MECHANISMS : Exact and approximate copied and generated types –
Peaucellier - Hart and Scott Russul – Grasshopper – Watt -T. Chebicheff and Robert Mechanisms -
Pantograph. STEERING GEARS: Conditions for correct steering – Davis Steering gear, Ackermans
steering gear. HOOKE‘S JOINT: Single and double Hooke‘s joint – Velocity Ratio – application –
problems.

UNIT – IV
CAMS: Definitions of cam and followers – their uses – Types of followers and cams – Terminology –
Types of follower motion - Uniform velocity, Simple harmonic motion and uniform acceleration.
Maximum velocity and maximum acceleration during outward and return strokes in the above 3 cases.
ANALYSIS OF MOTION OF FOLLOWERS: Tangent cam with Roller follower – circular arc cam with
straight, concave and convex flanks.

UNIT – V
HIGHER PAIRS: friction wheels and toothed gears – types – law of gearing, condition for constant
velocity ratio for transmission of motion - Velocity of sliding. Form of teeth, cycloidal and involute
profiles.– phenomena of interferences – Methods of interference. Condition for minimum number of
teeth to avoid interference - expressions for arc of contact and path of contact of Pinion & Gear –
Pinion and Rack arrangements – Introduction to Helical, Bevel and worm gearing. GEAR TRAINS:
Introduction – Types – Simple and reverted gear trains – Epicyclic gear train. Methods of finding train
value or velocity ratio of Epicyclic gear trains. Selection of gear box-Differential gear for an
automobile.

TEXT BOOKS
1.Theory of Machines and Mechanisms/ JOSEPH E. SHIGLEY/ Oxford/ 3rd Edition
2. Theory of machines/ Thomas Bevan/ Pearson/ 3rd edition,

REFERENCES BOOKS
1. Theory of Mechanisms and Machines/ Jagadish Lal
2. Theory of Machines / S.S. Rattan/ Tata McGraw-Hill education
3. Theory of Machines/ Sadhu Singh/ Pearson

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 92


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY LAB

II B.Tech. – II Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME18 - - 32

Course Overview
Metal casting, welding, mechanical press working, processing of plastics

Course Objectives
To make the student to know;
I. Design and manufacture of simple patterns
II. Sand testing
III. Arc welding, gas welding and resistance welding equipment for the fabrication of welded joints
IV. Pipe bending and injection molding equipment

Course Outcomes
The student will be able to;
1. Design and manufacture simple patterns
2. Control sand properties in foundry
3. Operate arc welding, gas welding and resistance welding equipment
4. Use pipe bending and injection moulding equipment

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Minimum of 12 Exercises need to be performed

I. METAL CASTING LAB


1. Pattern Design and making - for one casting drawing.
2. Sand properties testing - Exercise -for strengths, and permeability – 1
3. Moulding Melting and Casting - 1 Exercise

II. WELDING LAB

1. ARC Welding Lap & Butt Joint - 2 Exercises


2. Spot Welding - 1 Exercise
3. TIG Welding - 1 Exercise
4. Plasma welding and Brazing - 2 Exercises (Water Plasma Device)

III. MECHANICAL PRESS WORKING

1. Blanking & Piercing operation and study of simple, compound and progressive press tool.
2. Hydraulic Press: Deep drawing and extrusion operation.
3. Bending and other operations

IV. PROCESSING OF PLASTICS

1. Injection Moulding
2. Blow Moulding

Note: Minimum 10 of the above experiments are to be conducted.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 93


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

METALLURGY & MATERIAL SCIENCE LAB

II B.Tech. – II Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME19 1 - 3 3

Course overview
The purpose of this course is to make the students learn the concepts of Metallurgy and Mechanics of
solids role in all manufacturing processes which convert raw materials into useful products adapted to
human needs.

Course objectives
The primary focus of the Metallurgy and Mechanics of solids program is to provide undergraduates
with a fundamental knowledge based associated with materials-processing, their properties, and their
selection and application. Upon graduation, students would have acquired and developed the
necessary background and skills for successful careers in the materials-related industries.
Furthermore, after completing the program, the student should be well prepared for management
positions in industry or continued education toward a graduate degree.

Course Outcomes
On successful completion of this course the students have learned to,
1. Be able to apply general math, science and engineering skills to the solution of engineering
problems.
2. Be aware of social, safety and environmental consequences of their work, and be able to engage in
public debate regarding these issues.
3. Be able to solve core concepts in Materials Science to solve engineering problems.
4. Be knowledgeable of contemporary issues relevant to Metallurgy and Materials Science.
5. Be able to select materials for design.
6. Be able to design and conduct experiments, and to analyze data.
7. Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of a material science engineer.
8. Possess the skills and techniques necessary for modern materials engineering practice.

METALLURGY LAB

1. Specimen preparation for microstructure examination.


2. Preparation and study of the Micro Structure of pure metals like Iron, Cu and Al.
3. Preparation and study of the Microstructure of Mild steels, low carbon steels, high
carbon steels.
4. Study of the Micro Structures of Cast Irons.
5. Study of the Micro Structures of Non-Ferrous alloys.
6. Study of the Micro structures of Heat treated steels.
7. Jominy End Quench Test.
8. To find out the hardness of various treated and untreated steels.
9. Hardeneability of steels
10. Age Hardening

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 94


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

FLUID MECHANICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINERY LAB

II B.Tech. – II Semester LTPC


Course Code: A2ME20 - -3 2

Course Overview
The aim of this course is to introduce basic principles of fluid mechanics and it is further extended to
cover the application of fluid mechanics by the inclusion of fluid machinery. Nowadays the principles
of fluid mechanics find wide applications in many situations. The course deals with the fluid
machinery, like turbines, pumps in general and in power stations. This course also deals with the large
variety of fluids such as air, water, steam, etc; however the major emphasis is given for the study of
water.

Course Objectives
I. To understand the basic principles of fluid mechanics.
II. To identify various types of flows.
III. To understand boundary layer concepts and flow through pipes.
IV. To evaluate the performance of hydraulic turbines.
V. To understand the functioning and characteristic curves of pumps.

Course Outcomes
1. Able to explain the effect of fluid properties on a flow system.
2. Able to identify type of fluid flow patterns and describe continuity equation.
3. To analyze a variety of practical fluid flow and measuring devices and utilize fluid
mechanics principles in design.
4. To select and analyze an appropriate turbine with reference to given situation in power plants.
5. To estimate performance parameters of a given Centrifugal and Reciprocating pump.
6. Able to demonstrate boundary layer concepts.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Impact of jets on Vanes.


2. Performance Test on Pelton Wheel.
3. Performance Test on Francis Turbine.
4. Performance Test on Kaplan Turbine.
5. Performance Test on Single Stage Centrifugal Pump.
6. Performance Test on Multi Stage Centrifugal Pump.
7. Performance Test on Reciprocating Pump.
8. Calibration of Venturimeter.
9. Calibration of Orifice meter.
10. Determination of friction factor for a given pipe line.
11. Determination of loss of head due to sudden contraction in a pipeline.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 95


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
(MANDATORY NON-CREDIT COURSE)

II B.Tech. – II Semester L T PC
Course Code: A2HS16 3 - - 3

Course Overview

Environmental Studies majors will demonstrate knowledge of complex environmental systems and
environmental issues problems in scientific, cultural, and social realms. Environmental Studies majors
will demonstrate an understanding of the foundations of environmental problems in society from an
interdisciplinary approach. (Focusing on, but not limited to the social sciences and humanities
perspectives.)

Course Objectives

I. Critically evaluate information on human/environmental systems;


II. Integrate human ecology and science of environmental problems;
III. Articulate issues of social construction of science.
IV. Demonstrate skills needed to compete in green careers, including grant writing and oral
communication;
V. Complete an internship with an established environmental organization;
VI. Collaborate with local, regional, national, and international professionals in environmental
career and post graduate educational settings.

Course Outcomes

1. Students are able to identify the environmental conditions


2. Students are able to solve various ecosystem and biodiversity problems.

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE INTRODUCTION AND NATURAL RESOURCES: Introduction:


Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies: definition, scope and importance, need for public
awareness. Natural Resources: Renewable and non- renewable resources .Natural resources and
associated problems. Forest Resources: Use and over - exploitation, deforestation, timber extraction,
mining, dams and other effects on forest and tribal people. Water Resources: Use and over utilization
of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems.
Mineral Resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral
resources. Food Resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing,
effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, Organic farming
and Food miles. Energy Resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non-renewable energy
sources, use of alternate energy sources, Case studies.
Land Resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and
desertification. Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources. Equitable use of resources
for sustainable lifestyles.

UNIT - II
ECOSYSTEM AND BIODIVERSITY: Ecosystems: Concept of an ecosystem, structure and function
of an ecosystem, producers, consumers and decomposers. Energy flow in the ecosystem - ecological
succession, food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids. Introduction, types, characteristic
features, structure and function of the following ecosystem: forest ecosystem, grassland ecosystem,
desert ecosystem, aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans and estuaries).
Biodiversity and Its Conservation: Introduction - definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity,
value of biodiversity- consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values.
Biodiversity at global, national and local levels. India as mega diversity nation, hot-sports of
biodiversity, threats to biodiversity- habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man -wildlife conflicts.
Endangered and endemic species of India. Conservation of biodiversity- in-situ and ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 96


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT - III
ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION, GLOBAL ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES AND CONTROL
MEASURES: Environmental Pollution: definition, cause, effects and control measures of air pollution,
water pollution, soil pollution, marine pollution, noise pollution, thermal pollution and nuclear hazards.
Solid Waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes. Role
of an individual in prevention of pollution, pollution case studies. Disaster Management: Floods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. E-waste and plastic waste - recycling and reuse. Social Issues
and the Environment: From unsustainable to sustainable development, urban problems related to
energy. Water Conservation: Rain water harvesting, watershed management, resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns, case studies, climate change, global warming,
acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case Studies, wasteland
reclamation.

UNIT - IV
GREEN ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Introduction, Clean development mechanism, Carbon foot
printing, Carbon credits, Carbon sequestration, Polluter pay principle. Green building, practices,
approaches to green computing, Nanotechnology IS014000. Role of Information Technology in
environment and human health, case studies.

UNIT - V
ENVIRONMENTAL ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESMENT & ROLE OF NGOs:
Environmental Ethics:
Environment protection act, air (prevention and control of pollution) act, water (prevention and control
of pollution) act, wildlife protection act, forest conservation act, issues involved in enforcement of
environmental, legislation, public awareness. Environmental Impact Assesment: Conceptual facts of
EIA, baseline date acquisition, planning and management of impact studies, operational aspects of
EIA, methods for impact identification, prediction of impacts(air, water, noise, soil, biological and
socio-economics), environmental management plan, role of NGOs in creating awareness among
people regarding environmental issues.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Benny Joseph(2005),Environmental Studies,Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,
New Delhi.
2. Erach Bharucha (2005), Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses,
Universities Press, Hyderabad.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Anji Reddy. M(2007),Textbook of Environmental Sciences and Technology, BS Publications,
Hyderabad.
2. Rajagopalan. R (2009), Environmental Studies, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
3. Anubha Kaushik (2006), Perspectives in Environmental Science, 3rd Edition, New age
international, New Delhi.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 97


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

III B.TECH I SEMESTER


SYLLABUS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 98


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY
III B.Tech. – I Semester LT PC
Course Code:A2ME21 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
This course expands on the mechanical engineering student‘s background in dynamic synthesis and
analysis by providing significant skills and experience in creating and modeling mechanisms. This
course is intended to deal with the forces and their effects, while acting upon the machine parts in
motion. The knowledge of this subject is very essential for an engineer in designing the various parts
of a machine. Study of applications of gyroscopes is very helpful to learn the precession and its effect
on automobiles. The study of dynamics of machinery is an applied field of mechanical engineering
that is concerned with understanding the relationship between the geometry and the motions of the
parts of a machine and the forces that produce this motion. This course helps to learn how to analyze
the motions of mechanisms, design mechanisms to have given motions, and analyze forces in
machines. Application of vibrations to the analysis and design of machines and mechanical
components.

Course Objectives
I. The objectives of the course are to enable the student to have;
II. An ability to derive frictional forces on bodies in motion by applying knowledge of mathematics and
mechanics.
III. An ability to design and conduct experiments on gyroscopes, as well as to analyze and interpret
data.
IV. An ability to design, formulate, and solve engineering problems on clutches and brakes .
V. An ability to understand the purpose of dynamometers and find the power of an engine .
VI. An ability to balance both the rotating and reciprocating masses .
VII. An ability to study the vibrations of beams and springs when masses are attached
VIII. To enhance the ability of students to work in teams, establish the leadership role.
IX. The broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a global,
economic, environmental, and societal context.
X. A recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning.
An ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering
practice

Course Outcomes
1. After completing this course the student must demonstrate the knowledge and ability to:
2. Analyze Dynamics of the three-dimensional particle motion in various coordinate systems:
Cartesian, natural and cylindrical.
3. Ability to learn the concepts of gyroscopic effects and effect of precision motion on the
stability of moving vehicles.
4. Ability to learn the concepts of static and dynamic force analysis of planar mechanisms.
5. Understanding of the concepts of friction-clutches, brakes and dynamometers and its
importance.
6. Understanding the importance of turning moment diagrams, fly wheels and governors its
analysis.
7. Ability to understand concepts of various balancing of rotary and reciprocating mass.
8. Understanding of the concepts of vibrations and simple problems on forced damped
vibrations.
9. Able to communicate effectively in both verbal and written form.
10. Understanding of impact of engineering solutions on the society and also will be aware of
contemporary issues.
11. Develop confidence for self education and ability for life-long learning. 11. Can participate and
succeed in competitive examinations like GATE, GRE.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 99


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
PRECESSION: Gyroscopes, effect of precession motion on the stability of moving vehicles such as
motor car, motor cycle, aero planes and ships. FRICTION: Inclined plane, friction of screw and nuts,
pivot and collar, uniform pressure, uniform wear, friction circle and friction axis: lubricated surfaces,
boundary friction and film lubrication.

UNIT - II
CLUTCHES: Friction clutches, Single Disc or plate clutch, Multiple Disc Clutch, Cone Clutch,
Centrifugal Clutch. BRAKES AND DYNAMOMETERS: Simple block brakes, internal expanding brake,
band brake of vehicle. Dynamometers, absorption and transmission types. General description and
methods of operations.

UNIT - III
TURNING MOMENT DIAGRAM AND FLY WHEELS: Turning moment, Inertia Torque connecting rod
angular velocity and acceleration, crank effort and torque diagrams, Fluctuation of energy, Fly wheels
and their design. GOVERNERS: Watt, Porter and Proell governors. Spring loaded governors –
Hartnell and hartung with auxiliary springs. Sensitiveness, isochronisms and hunting.

UNIT - IV
BALANCING: Balancing of rotating masses Single and multiple, single and different planes.
BALANCING OF RECIPROCATING MASSES: Primary, Secondary, and higher balancing of
reciprocating masses.Analytical and graphical methods. Locomotive balancing - Hammer blow,
Swaying couple, variation of tractive efforts.

UNIT – V
VIBRATION: Free Vibration of mass attached to vertical spring, oscillation of pendulums, centers of
oscillation and suspension, Transverse loads, vibrations of beams with concentrated and distributed
loads, Dunkerly‘s methods, Raleigh‘s method, whirling of shafts, critical speeds, torsional vibrations.

TEXT BOOKS
1. S. S. Ratan (2012), Theory of Machines, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw- Hill education (P) Ltd, New
Delhi, India.
2. Thomas Bevan (2012), Theory of machines, 3rd edition, CBS Publishers, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. J. S. Rao, R. V. Dukkipati (2010), Mechanism and Machine Theory, New Age Publishers, New
Delhi, India.
2. Shiegly (2011), Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
3. Khurmi, R.S. (2011), Theory of machines, S.Chand publishers, New Delhi, India

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 100


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MACHINE TOOLS
III B.Tech. – I Semester LT PC
Course Code:A2ME22 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
At the very outset of engineering development materials were cut by means of simple hand tools.
Gradually, with the development of civilization and engineering, work done by hand tools give way to
the work performed by special machines which are called machine tools.
Hand tools are tools which are held and used by the hands for shaping and sizing a work and there is
no mechanism in them. The cutting away of the excess metal in the form of chips or small pieces is
simply done by the muscular efforts of man. As a result, the process is time consuming and not give
satisfactory surface finish. It includes files, saw, chisel, scrapper, etc. which are very commonly used
in bench and fitting works and assembly of machines.

Course Objectives

I. Machine tools is one of the important subject in mechanical engineering faculty, not only in educational
institutional, but it has very much of importance in industrial domain. Without a machine
tool, there is no industry.
II. A source of power is always needed in various workshop processes particularly in cutting and
forming of metal in a machine tool. In the metal-working industry work pieces of most different
shapes and dimensions and of different materials are worked. In every industry we need shaping of
materials.
III. This shaping of materials is done by either non-cutting process or cutting process. For example
forging, pressing, drawing, etc are non- cutting shaping processes. Turning, drilling, mailing etc are
comes under cutting shaping operations.
IV. The process of metal cutting in which chip is formed is affected by relative motion between the
work piece and the hard edge of a cutting tool held against the work piece. Such relative motion is
produced by combination of rotary and translating movements either of work piece or the cutting
tool or of both.
V. Machining process also include other processes like grinding, slotting, shaping, honing, planning,
lapping, and broaching operations.
VI. After completion of the machine tools course, students can be able to identify various applications
of different tools, can be able to differentiate various tools for different machining operations, and
also they can be able to solve many industrial problems regarding machine tools. And also as the
kinematics of machines studied, students can be able to design various machine tools for various
machines.

Course Outcomes

1. An ability to understand the basic parameters in the metal cutting operation, to Calculate
analytically the forces and other parameter associated with orthogonal cutting
2. An Ability To Know the various cutting fluids and their application methods, to understand the
importance of lathe, its many varieties and basic structure of center lathe
3. An ability to Understands operation of shaper, slotter , planer and drilling machine, the
characteristics feature of the milling and drilling machine
4. An ability To Know the various types of milling machine ,grinding machine, boring machine s
and their application and their operations, need for jigs and fixtures and Design jigs for practical
application
5. An ability to Know the various types of milling machine ,grinding machine, boring machine s
and their applications and their operations

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 101


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT – I
Elementary treatment of metal cutting theory – Element of cutting process – Geometry of single point
tool and angles chip formation and types of chips – built up edge and its effects chip breakers.
Mechanics of orthogonal cutting – Merchant‘s Force diagram, cutting forces – cutting speeds, feed,
depth of cut, tool life, coolants, mach inability – Tool materials.

UNIT – II
Engine lathe – Principle of working, specification of lathe – types of lathe – work & tool holding
devices-Taper turning thread, turning – for Lathes and attachments. Turret and capstan lathes –
Principal features of automatic lathes – classification – Single spindle and multi-spindle automatic
lathes – tool layout

UNIT – III
Shaping slotting and planing machines – Principles of working – Principal parts – specification
classification, operations performed. Kinematic scheme of the shaping slotting and planning
machines, machining time calculations.
Drilling and Boring Machines – Principles of working, specifications, types, operations performed –
tool holding devices – twist drill – Boring machines – Fine boring machines – Jig Boring machine.
Deep hole drilling machine. Kinematics scheme of the drilling and boring machines.

UNIT – IV
Milling machine – Principles of working – specifications – classifications of milling machines –
Principal features of horizontal, vertical and universal milling machines – machining operations Types
geometry of milling cutters – milling cutters – methods of indexing – Accessories to milling machines,
kinematic scheme of milling cutters – milling cutters – methods of indexing.
Lapping, honing and broaching machines – comparison to grinding – lapping and honing. Kinematics
scheme of Lapping, Honing and Broaching machines. Constructional features of speed and feed
Units, machining time calculations

UNIT –V
Grinding machine – Fundamentals – Theory of grinding – classification of grinding machine –
cylindrical and surface grinding machine – Tool and cutter grinding machine – special types of
grinding machines – Different types of abrasives – bonds specification of a grinding wheel and
selection of a grinding wheel Kinematic scheme of grinding machines.

TEXT BOOKS
1.Production Technology by R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta.
2.Production Technology by H.M.T. (Hindustan Machine Tools).

REFERENCE BOOKS
1.Machine Tools – C.Elanchezhian and M. Vijayan / Anuradha Agencies Publishers.
2.Workshop Technology – B.S.Raghu Vamshi – Vol II
3.Principles of machine Tools/ Bhattacharya A and Sen.G.C./New central Book Agency.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 102


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

THERMAL ENGINEERING – II
III B.Tech. – I Semester LTPC
Course Code: A2ME23 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
The subject, ―Thermal Engineering-II‖ is designed to cover many important applications of
thermodynamics. The subject Thermal Engineering-II is the advanced course of thermodynamic
application hence it calls for the study of basic thermodynamics apart from basic science subjects
like physics, math and to some extent the chemistry.
The first step is to understand the rankine cycle and the methods to improve the efficiency of the
rankine cycle. We learn the principle of boilers and classification of boilers. The main important
concept is steam turbines which helps us to learn velocity triangles of impulse and reaction turbines.
Gas turbines are the one which are used in jet propulsion. So we will learn in detail about
classification of gas turbines. In this we also learn basic concept of jet propulsion and rockets.

Course Objectives
The basic objective of the subject is to learn the fundamentals of the thermodynamic cycles utilized
for steam generators, steam turbines, gas turbines and its application. It also facilitates to know the
fundamentals and basic principles, of major components of steam power plants and other turbo
machinery and their applications.

The subject is divided into five units to deal it conveniently. The unit one, exhaustively deals with basic
concepts, thermodynamic cycle and analysis. It also deals fundamentals of fuels and their
combustion. Steam generators including high pressure boilers, their mountings and accessories are
dealt in unit two. Steam nozzle a major component in steam generators are dealt in unit two. It deals
with velocity, discharge, flow types, in the steam nozzle application.

The unit three deals with steam turbines working principle, classifications condition for maximum
efficiency and compounding are dealt. Unit three mainly focuses on reaction turbines. In Unit three the
steam condensers are dealt, classification, Principle efficiency, air leakage, air pump are mentioned
for study. The unit four mainly focuses on as turbines it covers, simple gas power plant, ideal cycle,
basic components, compressors, combustion chambers and turbines are be studied. The Unit five
deals with jet propulsion. The basic concepts of thrust, thrust power, propulsion efficiency are to be
focused. The jet engines, turbo jet engines, rockets, impulse solid and liquid propellant rocket engines
are also to be dealt exhaustively.
Upon completion of the course, students should understand the following:
1. Understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics
2. Understand the combustion and fuels
3. Understand the working principle of boilers
4. Explain the function of nozzles
5. Understand the working of steam turbines and reaction turbines
6. Understand the principles of steam condensers
7. Understand the working of gas turbines
8. Explain the jet propulsion types
9. Understand the concept of rockets
10.
Course Outcomes
This course uses lectures, assignments and home works to the students. The teaching methods
include regular class work, Problem solving, technical quiz, and seminars to enable the
students:
1. To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle
2. To understand about the fuels and combustion
3. To understand and classify boilers
4. To study and apply the principle of nozzle
5. To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 103


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I
BASIC CONCEPTS: Rankine cycle - Schematic layout, Thermodynamic Analysis, Concept of Mean
Temperature of Heataddition, Methods to improve cycle performance, Regeneration and reheating.
COMBUSTION: fuels and combustion, adiabatic flame temperature, stoichiometry, flue gas analysis

UNIT - II
BOILERS : Classification , Working principles , with sketches including H.P. Boilers , Mountings and
Accessories ,Working principles, Boiler horse power, equivalent evaporation, efficiency and heat
balance , Draught, classification , Height of chimney for given draught and discharge, condition for
maximum discharge , artificial draught, induced and forced
STEAM NOZZLES: Function of nozzle, applications, types, Flow through nozzles, thermodynamic
analysis , assumptions,velocity of nozzle at exit-Ideal and actual expansion in nozzle, velocity
coefficient, condition for maximum discharge, critical pressure ratio and criteria to decide nozzle
shape.

UNIT - III
STEAM CONDENSERS: Requirements of steam condensing plant, Classification of condensers,
working principle ofdifferent types, vacuum efficiency and condenser efficiency, air leakage, sources
and its affects, air pump, cooling water requirement.
STEAM TURBINES: Classification , Impulse turbine; Mechanical details , Velocity diagram , effect of
friction, powerdeveloped, axial thrust, blade or diagram efficiency , condition for maximum efficiency.
De-Laval Turbine - its features. Methods to reduce rotor speed-Velocity compounding and pressure
compounding, Velocity and Pressure variation along the flow, combined velocity diagram for a
velocity compounded impulse turbine.

UNIT - IV
REACTION TURBINE: Mechanical details, principle of operation, thermodynamic analysis of a stage,
degree of reaction,velocity diagram, Parson‘s reaction turbine, condition for maximum efficiency.
GAS TURBINES : Simple gas turbine plant , Ideal cycle, essential components, parameters of
performance, actual cycle ,regeneration, inter cooling and reheating ,Closed and Semi-closed cycles
, merits and demerits.

UNIT - V
JET PROPULSION: Principle of Operation ,Classification of jet propulsive engines , Working
Principles with schematicdiagrams and representation on T-S diagram , Thrust, Thrust Power and
Propulsion Efficiency ,Turbo jet engines Schematic Diagram, Thermodynamic Cycle, Performance
Evaluation.
ROCKETS: Application, Working Principle, Classification, Propellant Type, Solid and Liquid propellant
Rocket Engines.

TEXT BOOKS
th
1. R. K. Rajput (2012), Thermal Engineering, 18 edition, Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi, India.
th
2. Cohen, Rogers, SaravanaMuttoo(2011), Gas Turbines, 9 edition, Addison Wesley Longman,
New Delhi, India.

REFERENCES BOOKS
rd
1. V. Ganesan (2011), Gas Turbines, 3 edition, Tata McGraw-Hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi,
India.
th
2. R. Yadav (2011), Thermodynamics and Heat Engines, 7 Edition, Central Book Depot,
Allahabad, India.
th
3. P. Khajuria, S. P. Dubey(2009), Gas Turbines and Propulsive Systems, 5 edition, Dhanpatrai
Publications, New Delhi, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 104


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS – II

III B. Tech. - I Semester L TP C


Course Code: A2ME24 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
The design of machine members-II focus mainly on design of power transmitting elements like gears,
connecting rod, crankpin, crankshafts, pistons, cylinders, bearings, belts, ropes, chain‘s, pulleys,
Power screws and nuts. Design basis is strength and stiffness of the parts and selection of material
for manufacture of machine elements.

Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to enable the student in;
I. In design and analysis of power transmitting elements and selection of suitable materials and
manufacture of these components.
II. Analyzing the forces acting on various power transmission components and their
construction.
III. Applying the theories of failure and select optimum design size for various power
transmission elements.
IV. Understanding need for bearing elements and construction of various bearings and their
application for different purposes in power transmission.
V. Theory of bearing and principles involved in design engineering in respect of spur, helical,
bevel and worm and worm gear drives.

Course Outcomes
At the end of this course, the student shall have;
1. Ability to identify design variables and performance factors in the study of journal bearings.
2. Ability to identify different types of rolling contact bearings, their basic features, related
terminology and designations.
3. Ability to select rolling contact bearings for a given application.
4. Awareness of the basic features, prime movers and the means of transmission commonly
used in power engineering, mechanical.
5. Acquaintance with the terminology, geometry and basic kinematics concepts associated
with gearing.
6. Ability to analyze and design all types of gears for given application.
7. Ability in using and obtaining information from engineering data handbooks.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 105


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
BEARINGS: Types of Journal bearings – lubrication – Bearing modulus –Full and partial bearings,
Partial bearings – Clearance ratio – Heat dissipation of bearings, bearing materials – journal bearing
design – Ball and roller bearings – Static loading of ball and roller bearings, Bearing life.

UNIT-II
ENGINE PARTS: Connecting rod: Thrust in connecting rod – stress due to whipping action on
connecting rod ends – Cranks and Crank shafts, strength and proportions of over hung and center
cranks-Crank pins, Crank shafts.
Pistons, Forces acting on piston-Construction Design and proportions of piston,Cylinder,Cylinder
liners.

UNIT-III
Design of power screws: Design of screw,Square,ACME,Buttress screws,design of nut,compound
screw,differential screw, ball screw – possible failures.

UNIT-IV
Power Transmissios systems,pulleys: Transmission of power by Belt and Rope
drives,Transmission efficiencies,Belts-Flat and V types-Ropes-Pulleys for belt and rope
drives,Materials,Chain drives.

UNIT-V
SPUR & HELICAL GEAR DRIVES: Spur gears-Helical gears-Load concentration factor-Dynamic load
factor,Surface compressive strength,Bending strength- Design analysis of spur gears-Estimation of
centre distance,module and face width,check for plastic deformation,check for dynamic and wear
considerations.

TEXT BOOKS
rd
1.V.Bandari(2011), A Text Book of Design of Machine Elements,3 edition,Tata McGraw hill
education(P)
Ltd.New Delhi,India.
nd
2. R.L.Norton(2006),Machine Design(An Integrated approach), 2 edition,Pearson
Publishers,Chennai,India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1.A Text book of Machine Design by R.S.Khurmi
rd
2.S.MD.Jalaludin,(2011),Machine Design,3 Edition, Anuradha Publishers, Chennai,India.
nd
3.P.Kannaiah(2012), ,2 Edition, Scitech Publications,India Pvt.Ltd.New Delhi,India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 106


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB

III B. Tech. - I Semester LT PC


Course Code: A2ME28 - 1 33

Course Overview
Analyze the operation and control of engines, power plants, pumps and compressors. Emphasis on
principles underlying performance characteristics of devices, measurement techniques, interpretation
of experimental data, and presentation of results.

Course Objectives
Students learn:
I. To apply basic conservation laws to understand the performance of energy conversion
systems.
II. To make measurements appropriate to the characterization of energy conversion systems.
III. To write reports describing the performance of energy conversion systems.
IV. To give effective oral presentations on experimental characterization of energy conversion
systems.

Course Outcomes
At the conclusion of the course, students will have:
1. An understanding of the basic performance of pumps and compressors.
2. An understanding of the performance and emissions of Diesel and spark ignition engines.
3. An understanding of basic cogeneration principles.
4. An understanding of good laboratory practice.
5. An ability to prepare effective written reports on the performance of energy conversion
systems.
6. An ability to prepare and present effective oral reports on the performance of energy
conversion systems.

SYLLABUS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. I.C. Engines Valve / Port Timing Diagrams


2. I.C. Engines Performance Test (4 -Stroke Diesel Engines)
3. I.C. Engines Performance Test on 2-Stroke Petrol
4. Evaluation of Engine friction by conducting Morse test on 4-Stroke Multi cylinder Petrol Engine
and retardation and motoring test on 4- stroke diesel engine
5. I.C. Engines Heat Balance.
6. I.C. Engines Air/Fuel Ratio and Volumetric Efficiency
7. Performance Test on Variable Compression Ratio Engines, economical speed test.
8. Performance Test on Reciprocating Air – Compressor Unit
9. Study of Boilers
10. Dis-assembly / Assembly of Engines.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 107


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MACHINE TOOLS LAB


III B. Tech. - I Semester LTPC
Course Code: A2ME29 - -3 2

Course Overview
By the end of the course student will be able to perform Step turning and taper turning using lathe
machine, Thread cutting and knurling using lathe machine, Drilling and step boring using lathe
machine,drilling and Tapping using drilling machine, Length, Depth, Diameter measuring using vernier
calipers & micrometer. Bore measurement using bore gauge Use of gear teeth caliper for checking
the chordal addendum and chordal height of spur gear. Angle and taper measurements using Bevel
protractor, Sine bar and slip gauges.

Course Objectives

I. To create awareness on various mechanical measuring instruments.


II. To make students familiar with various operations on machine tools.

Course Outcomes

1. Hands on experience on lathe machine to performturning, facing, threading operations.


2. Practical exposure on flat surface machining, milling and grinding operations.
3. Skill development in drilling and threading operations.
4. Linear and angular measurements exposure.

SYLLABUS

MACHINE TOOLS LAB-SYLLABUS


1. Step turning and taper turning using lathe machine.
2. Thread cutting and knurling using lathe machine.
3. Drilling and Tapping using drilling machine.
4. Shaping of V groove using shaper.
5. Slotting of a keyway using slotter machine.
6. Milling Machine operations..
7. Surface Grinding.
8. Planing Machine operations
9. Cylindrical grinding Operations.
10.Tool and cutter grinding operations

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 108


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY LAB


III B. Tech. - I Semester L TPC
Course Code: A2ME30 - -3 2

Course Overview
By the end of the course student will be able to perform vibration analysis, balancing system and
Trajectory planning of a robot in joint space scheme..

Course Objectives
To create awareness on various vibration systems, gyroscopic couple, natural frequency and FFT
analyzer.

Course Outcomes
At the conclusion of the course, students will have:
1. An understanding of the basic performance of steady state amplitude of a forced vibratory system
2. An understanding of the performance of Static balancing using steel balls
3. An understanding of basic Direct Kinematic analysis of a robot
4. An understanding of good laboratory practice.
5. An ability to prepare effective written reports on the performance Palletizing operation using
Robot programming

SYLLABUS

A Minimum of 10 experiments are to be conducted)


Experiments:
1. Determination of damped natural frequency of vibration of the vibrating system with
different viscous oils.
2. Determination of steady state amplitude of a forced vibratory system.
3. Static balancing using steel balls.
4. Determination of the magnitude and orientation of the balancing mass in dynamic balancing.
5. Field balancing of the thin rotors using vibration pickups.
6. Determination of the magnitude of gyroscopic couple, angular velocity of precession
and representation of vectors.
7. Determination of natural frequency of given structure using FFT analyzer.
8. Diagnosis of a machine using FFT analyzer.
9. Direct Kinematic analysis of a robot.
10. Inverse Kinematic analysis of a robot.
11. Palletizing operation using Robot programming.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 109


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

TECHNICAL SEMINAR-II

III B.Tech. – I Semester L T P C


Course Code: A2ME71 - - 2 -

Course Objective:
Seminar is an important component of learning in an Engineering College, where the student
gets acquainted with preparing a report & presentation on a topic.

PERIODICITY / FREQUENCY OF EVALUATION : Twice

PARAMETERS OF EVALUATION:
1. The seminar shall have topic allotted and approved by the faculty.
2. The seminar is evaluated for 25 marks for internal and 25 marks for external.
3. The students shall be required to submit the rough drafts of the seminar outputs
within one week of the commencement of the class work.
4. Faculty shall make suggestions for modification in the rough draft. The final draft shall
be presented by the student within a week thereafter.
5. Presentation schedules will be prepared by Department in line with the academic
calendar.

The Seminars shall be evaluated in two stages as follows:

C. Rough draft
In this stage, the student should collect information from various sources on the topic and
collate them in a systematic manner. He/ She may take the help of the concerned faculty. The
report should be typed in ―MS-Word‖ file with ―calibri‖ font, with font size of 16 for main
heading, 14 for sub-headings and 11 for the body text. The contents should also be arranged
in Power Point Presentation with relevant diagrams, pictures and illustrations. It should
normally contain 10 to 15 slides, consisting of the followings:

1. Topic, name of the student & faculty 1 Slide


2. List of contents 1 Slide
3. Introduction 1Slide
4. Descriptions of the topic (point-wise) 6 - 10 Slides
5. Conclusion 1 - 2 Slides
6. References/Bibliography 1 Slide

The soft copy of the rough draft of the seminar presentation in MS Power Point format along
with the draft report should be submitted to the concerned faculty, with a copy to the
concerned HOD within stipulated time.

The evaluation of the rough draft shall generally be based upon the following.

1 Punctuality in submission of rough draft 2


2 Dress Code 3
3 Resources from which the seminar have been based 2
4 Report , and content of Presentation 5
5 Depth of the students knowledge in the subject 5
6 Reception from Questions 5
7 Time Management, Classroom Dynamic 3
Total Marks 25

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 110


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

After evaluation of the first draft the supervisor shall suggest further reading, additional work
and fine tuning, to improve the quality of the seminar work.

Within 7 days of the submission of the rough draft, the students are to submit the final draft
incorporating the suggestions made by the faculty.

D. Presentation: (External )

After finalization of the final draft, the students shall be allotted dates for presentation (in the
designated seminar classes) and they shall then present it in presence students, HOD,
Incharge, faculties of the department and at least one faculty from some department / other
department.

The student shall submit 3 copies of the Report neatly bound along with 2 soft copies of the
PPT in DVD medium. The students shall also distribute the title and abstract of the seminar in
hard copy to the audience. The final presentation has to be delivered with 18-25 slides.

The evaluation of the Presentation shall generally be based upon the following.

1. Contents 5 Marks
2. Delivery 5 Marks
3. Relevance and interest the topic creates 5 Marks
4. Ability to involve the spectators 5 Marks
5. Question answer session 5 Marks
Total 25 Marks

6. WHO WILL EVALUATE?


The presentation of the seminar topics shall be made before an internal evaluation committee
comprising the Head of the Department or his/her nominee, seminar supervisor and a senior faculty of
the department / other department.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 111


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

III B.TECH II SEMESTER


SYLLABUS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 112


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING METROLOGY

III B. Tech. - II Semester L TP C


Course Code: A2ME31 3 1 - 3

Course over view


To provide a basic understanding of the wide range of activities encompassed by personnel working
in standards and calibration laboratories. It covers the measurement process, types and correct use of
measurement and test equipment, and measurement standards. It provides an opportunity for
students to learn about measurement uncertainty and risk analysis. The course includes the
procedures necessary to set up and to have knowledge on calibration. At the end of this subject the
student is expected: It is expected to enforce, validate and verify predefined standards for traceability,
accuracy, reliability, and precision. All of these are factors that would affect the validity of
measurement. Although these standards vary widely, these are mandated by the government, the
agencies, and some treaties. Consequently, these standards are verified and tested against a
recognized quality system in calibration laboratories

Course Objectives
I. To be familiar with the different instruments those are available for linear, angular,
roundness and
II. roughness measurements.
III. To be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc.)
IV. It is the aim of this course to provide students with practical skills associated with each of
these areas. Metrology activities include precision measurement of component features,
form and geometry utilizing specialized measuring instruments and equipment.
V. Effectively designing product processing methods.
VI. To enhance the ability of students to apply scientific methods of protection

Course Outcomes

1. Graduates will demonstrate basic knowledge in mathematics, science and engineering


2. Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of their professional and ethical responsibilities
3. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to function on engineering and science laboratory
teams, as well as on multidisciplinary design teams
4. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to identify, formulate and solve mechanical engineering
problems
5. Graduates will have the confidence to apply engineering solutions in global and societal
contexts. Graduates should be capable of self-education and clearly understand the value of
life-long learning. Graduates will have ability to communicate in written, oral and graphical
forms.

SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
Systems of limits and fits: Introduction, normal size, tolerance limits, deviations, allowance, fits and
their types - unilateral and bilateral tolerance system, hole and shaft basis systems -
interchangeability and selective assembly. Indian standard Institution system - British standard
system, International Standard system for plain ad screwed work.

UNIT - II
LINEAR MEASUREMENT : Length standard, line and end standard, slip gauges - calibration of the
slip gauges, Dial indicator, micrometers. MEASUREMENT OF ANGLES AND TAPERS : Different
methods - Bevel protractor - angle slip gauges - spirit levels - sine bar - Sine plate, rollers and spheres
used to determine the tapers. LIMIT GAUGES : Taylors principle - Design of go and No go gauges,
plug ring, snap, gap, taper, profile and position gauges.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 113


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT - III
OPTICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS : Tool maker's microscope and its uses - collimators, optical
projector - optical flats and their uses, interferometer. FLAT SURFACE MEASUREMENT :
Measurement of flat surfaces - instruments used - straight edges - surface plates - optical flat and
auto collimator.

UNIT - IV
SURFACE ROUGHNESS MEASUREMENT : Differences between surface roughness and surface
waviness-Numerical assessment of surface finish - CLA,R, R.M.S Values - Rz values, Rz value,
Methods of measurement of surface finish-profilograph. Talysurf, ISI symbols for indication of surface
finish.

UNIT-V
SCREW THREAD MEASUREMENT : Element of measurement - errors in screw threads -
measurement of effective diameter, angle of thread and thread pitch, profile thread gauges.
MEASUREMENT THROUGH COMPARATORS : Comparators - Mechanical, Electrical and Electronic
Comparators, pneumatic comparators and their uses in mass production. MACHINE TOOL
ALIGNMENT TESTS : Requirements of Machine Tool Alignment Tests, Alignment tests on lathe,
milling, drilling machine tools.. Preparation of acceptance charts. GEAR MEASUREMENT: Gear
measuring instruments, Gear tooth profile measurement. Measurement of diameter, pitch pressure
angle and tooth thickness. Coordinate Measuring Machines: Types of CMM, Role of CMM, and
Applications of CMM.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Engineering Metrology / I C Gupta./ Danpath Rai
2. Engineering Metrology / R.K. Jain / Khanna Publishers

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. BIS standards on Limits & Fits, Surface Finish, Machine Tool Alignment etc.
2. Principles of Engineering Metrology, Rajendra
3.Metrology & Measurement, Bewoor, Anand K

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 114


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

HEAT TRANSFER

III B. Tech. - II Semester L T P C


Course Code: A2ME32 3 1 - 3

Course over view


Heat flows across temperature differences. There are three modes of heat transfer: conduction,
radiation, and convection. Conduction and radiation are fundamental physical mechanisms, while
convection is really conduction as affected by fluid flow.
Conduction is an exchange of energy by direct interaction between molecules of a substance
containing temperature differences. It occurs in gases, liquids, or solids and has a strong basis in the
molecular kinetic theory of physics.
Radiation is a transfer of thermal energy in the form of electromagnetic waves emitted by atomic and
subatomic agitation at the surface of a body. Like all electromagnetic waves (light, X-rays,
microwaves), thermal radiation travels at the speed of light, passing most easily through a vacuum or
a nearly "transparent" gas such as oxygen or nitrogen. Liquids, "participating" gases such as carbon
dioxide and water vapor, and glasses transmit only a portion of incident radiation. Most other solids
are essentially opaque to radiation. The analysis of thermal radiation has a strong theoretical basis in
physics, beginning with the work of Maxwell and of Planck.
Convection may be described as conduction in a fluid as enhanced by the motion of the fluid. It may
not be a truly independent mode, but convection is the most heavily studied problem in heat transfer:
More than three-quarters of all published heat transfer papers deal with convection. This is because
convection is a difficult subject, being strongly influenced by geometry, turbulence, and fluid
properties.

Course Objectives
I. Understand heat transfer fundamentals, and apply them to engineering problem solving
II .Understand and practice heat transfer measurements in laboratories, and compare
measurements with theories
III. Use Excel for data analyses and engineering plots, and use Word for technical report writing
IV. Consider experimental design issues for heat transfer laboratories

Course Outcomes
1. Students are able to model the given heat transfer problem mathematically, categorize the
heat transfer problems
2. Students are able to derive the equation for temperature distribution in fins, to estimate the
rate of heat transfer through conduction through slabs, cylindrical and spherical surface
objects.
3. Students are capable to design the thickness of insulation based on the requirement of heat
transfer
4. Students are able to estimate the rate of heat transfer heat transfer coefficients for forced and
free convection Heat transfer problems
5. Students are able to perform the LMTD & NTU analysis to the heat exchanger problems, to
analyze and design the boiling heat transfer problems
6. Students are able to analyze and design the Condensation heat transfer problems, to analyze
and estimate the heat transfer through radiation.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 115


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION: Modes and mechanisms of heat transfer, Basic laws of heat transfer, Applications
of heat transfer. General three dimensional heat conduction equations in Cartesian, Cylindrical and
Spherical coordinates. Different forms of general equation, Steady state and Transient heat transfer,
Initial and boundary conditions.

UNIT - II
CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER: One dimensional steady state heat conduction through
Homogeneous slabs, hollow cylinders and spheres, Overall heat transfer coefficient, Electrical
analogy, Critical radius of insulation. Systems with variable thermal conductivity and Systems with
internal heat generation. Extended surfaces (Fins) , Long, Short and insulated tips.
ONE DIMENSIONAL TRANSIENT HEAT CONDUCTION: Systems with negligible internal
resistance, Significance of Biot and Fourier Numbers, Chart solutions of transient conduction systems

UNIT - III
CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER: Concepts of Continuity, Momentum and Energy Equations.
Dimensional analysis-Buckingham‘s Pi Theorem - Application for developing non-dimensional
correlation for convective heat transfer.
FORCED CONVECTION: External Flows, Concepts of hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer
and use of empirical correlations for Flat plates and Cylinders. Internal Flows, Concepts about
Hydrodynamic and Thermal Entry Lengths, use of empirical correlations for Horizontal Pipe Flow and
annulus flow.
FREE CONVECTION: Development of Hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer along a vertical
plate , Use of empirical relations for Vertical plates and pipes.

UNIT - IV
BOILING AND CONDENSATION: Regimes of Pool boiling and Flow boiling, Critical heat flux,
Calculations on Nucleate Boiling. Film wise and drop wise condensation, Nusselt‘s theory of
condensation on a vertical plate - Film condensation on vertical and horizontal cylinders using
empirical correlations.
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Classification of heat exchangers, overall heat transfer Coefficient and fouling
factor, Concepts of LMTD and NTU methods, Problems using LMTD and NTU methods.

UNIT - V
RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER: Emission characteristics , Laws of black-body radiation, Irradiation ,Total
and monochromatic quantities , Laws of Planck, Wien, Kirchhoff, Lambert, Stefan and Boltzmann , Heat
exchange between two black bodies , concepts of shape factor , Emissivity ,heat exchange between grey
bodies , radiation shields ,electrical analogy for radiation networks.

TEXT BOOKS
th
1. Yunus A. Cengel (2012), Heat Transfer a Practical Approach, 4 edition, Tata McGraw hill
education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
rd
2. R. C. Sachdeva (2012), Fundamentals of Engineering, Heat and Man Transfer, 3 edition, New
Age, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
th
1. Holman (2012), Heat Transfer (SI Units), 10 edition, Tata McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New
Delhi, India.
nd
2. P. S. Ghoshdastidar (2012), Heat Transfer, 2 edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi,
India.
th
3. Incropera, Dewitt (2012), Fundamentals of Heat Transfer, 6 edition, John Wiley, UK.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 116


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COMPOSITE MATERIALS
III B. Tech. - II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME38 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
This course is designed for building foundational knowledge in composites. It introduces the concept
of: (1) Characterization and application of composite, (2) the methods of composite strengthening, and
(3) production routes and performance of composites.

Course Objectives

I. An ability to identify the properties of fiber and matrix materials used in commercial composites, as
well as some common manufacturing techniques.
II. An ability to predict the elastic properties of both long and short fiber composites based on the
constituent properties.
III. An ability to rotate stress, strain and stiffness tensors using ideas from matrix algebra.

Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to

1. identify and explain the types of composite materials and their characteristic features
2. understand the differences in the strengthening mechanism of composite and its corresponding
3. effect on performance and application;
4. understand and explain the methods employed in composite fabrication;
5. learn simple micromechanics and failure modes of composites.

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITE MATERIALS: Introduction, classification, polymer matrix
composites, metal matrix composites, ceramic matrix composites, carbon-carbon composites, fiber,
reinforced composites and nature-made composites and applications.
REINFORCEMENTS: Fibers Glass, Silica, Kevlar, carbon, boron, silicon carbide, and born carbide,
fibres. Particulate composites, Polymer composites, Thermoplastics,Thermosetts, Metal matrix and
ceramic composites.

UNIT—II
MANUFACTURING METHODS: Autoclave, tape production, moulding methods, filament winding,
man lay up, pultrusion, RTM, Stirr casting.

UNIT—III
MACROMECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: introduction, definitions: stress, strain, Elastic
Moduli, strain Energy. Hooke's Law for different types of materials, Hooks Law for a two dimensional
unidirectional lamina, plane stress assumption, reduction of Hooks Law in three dimensions to two
dimensions, relationship of compliance and stiffness matrix to engineering elastic constants of a
lamina.

UNIT —IV
MICROMECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: Introduction, Volume and Mass Fractions,
Density, and Void Content, Evaluation of the Four Elastic Moduli, Strength of Materials Approach,
Semi Empirical Models Elasticity Approach, Elastic Moduli of Lamina with Transversely Isotropic
Fibers, Ultimate Strengths of a Unidirectional Lamina, Coefficients of Thermal Expansion, Coefficients
of Moisture Expansion .

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 117


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT- V
MACROMECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF LAMINATES: Introduction, Laminate Code, Stress-Strain
Relations for a Laminate, In-Plane and Flexural Moduls of a Laminate.
Failure Analysis and Design of Laminates: Introduction Special Cases of Laminates, Failure
Criterion for a Laminate, Design of a Laminated Composite, Other Mechanical Design Issues
TEXT BOOKS

1. Engineering Mechanics of Composite materials by Issac and M Daniel


2. R.M Jones, Mechanics of composite Materials, McGraw Hill Company, New York, 1975

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. D.Agarwal and L. Broutman, Analysis and performance of fibre Composites, Wikley- interscience.
2. L.R Calcote, Analysis of Laminated Composite Structuresm Van Nostrand Rainfold, New York,
1969
3.Mechanics of Composite Materials, Mukhopadhyay

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 118


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

HEAT TRANSFER LAB


III B. Tech. - II Semester LTP C
Course Code: A2ME41 - -3 2

Course over view


Heat flows across temperature differences. There are three modes of heat transfer: conduction,
radiation, and convection. Conduction and radiation are fundamental physical mechanisms, while
convection is really conduction as affected by fluid flow.
Conduction is an exchange of energy by direct interaction between molecules of a substance
containing temperature differences. It occurs in gases, liquids, or solids and has a strong basis in the
molecular kinetic theory of physics.
Course Objectives
I. Understand heat transfer fundamentals, and apply them to engineering problems.
II. Understanding practical heat transfer measurements in laboratories, and compare
measurements with theories
III. Use Excel for data analyses and engineering plots, and use word for technical report
writing IV. Consider experimental design issues for heat transfer laboratories

Course Outcomes

1. Understand the basic laws of heat transfer, account for the consequence of heat transfer in
thermal analyses of engineering systems.
2. Analyze problems involving steady state heat conduction in simple geometries, develop
solutions for transient heat conduction in simple geometries.
3. Obtain numerical solutions for conduction and radiation heat transfer problems, understand
the fundamentals of convective heat transfer process.
4. Evaluate heat transfer coefficients for natural convection, inside ducts.
5. Evaluate heat transfer coefficients for forced convection over exterior surfaces.

SYLLABUS
Minimum twelve experiments from the following:

1. Composite Slab Apparatus – Overall heat transfer co-efficient.


2. Heat transfer through lagged pipe.
3. Heat Transfer through a Concentric Sphere
4. Thermal Conductivity of given metal rod.
5. Heat transfer through pin-fin
6. Experiment on Transient Heat Conduction
7. Heat transfer in forced convection apparatus.
8. Heat transfer in natural convection
9. Parallel and counter flow heat exchanger.
10. Emissivity apparatus.
11. Stefan Boltzmann Apparatus.
12. Heat transfer in drop and film wise condensation.
13. Critical Heat flux apparatus.
14. Study of heat pipe and its demonstration.
15. Study of Two – Phase flow.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 119


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

METROLOGY LAB

III B. Tech. - II Semester LTP C


Course Code: A2ME42 - -3 2

Course Overview
By the end of the course student will be able to perform the measurements Length, Depth, Diameter
measuring using vernier calipers & micrometer. Bore measurement using bore gauge Use of gear
teeth caliper for checking the chordal addendum and chordal height of spur gear. Angle and taper
measurements using Bevel protractor, Sine bar and slip gauges.

Course Objectives
I. To create awareness on various mechanical measuring instruments.
II. To make students familiar with various operations on machine tools.

Course Outcomes
1. Hands on experience on lathe machine to performturning, facing, threading operations.
2. Practical exposure on flat surface machining, milling and grinding operations.
3. Skill development in drilling and threading operations.
4. Linear and angular measurements exposure.

SYLLABUS

1. Measurement of outside & inside diameter using Vernier calipers.


2. Measurement of outside & inside diameter using Micro Meter.
3. Height measurement by Vernier height gauge.
4. Gear tooth parameters measurement by Gear Tooth Micrometer.
5. Gear tooth thickness by Gear Tooth Micrometer.
6. Depth measurement by Micrometer Depth Gauge.
7. Angle measurement by using bevelprotractor.
8. Angle Measurement by using Sine bar & Slip Gauges.
9. Bore measurement using bore gauge.
10. Screw thread measurement by Three wire method.
11. Surface flatness measurement by sprit level
12. Lathe Machine Alignment Test.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 120


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ADVANCED ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB

III B. Tech. - II Semester


Course Code: A2HS13 L T P C
- 1 3 2
Course overview

The English Language Lab is considered essential at 3 rd year level. At this stage the students need
to prepare themselves for their careers which may require them to listen to, read, speak and write in
English both for their professional and interpersonal communication in the globalised context. The
proposed course should be an integrated theory and lab course to enable students to use ‗good‘
English and perform the following: Gather ideas and information, to organise ideas relevantly and
coherently. Engage in debates. Participate in group discussions. Face interviews. Write
project/research reports/technical reports. Make oral presentations. Write formal letters. Transfer
information from non-verbal to verbal texts and vice versa. To take part in social and professional
communication.

Course Objectives

I. This Lab focuses on using computer-aided multimedia instruction for language development
to meet the following targets:
II. To improve the students‘ fluency in English, through a well-developed vocabulary and enable
them
III. To listen to English spoken at normal conversational speed by educated English speakers
IV. Respond appropriately in different socio-cultural and professional contexts.

Course Out Comes

1. Accomplishment of sound vocabulary and its proper use contextetually


2. Flair in writing and felicity in written expression
3. Enhanced job prospects
4. Effective speaking abilities

SYLLABUS

The following course content is prescribed for the Advanced Communication Skills Lab:
Functional English - starting a conversation – responding appropriately and relevantly – using the
right body language – role play in different situations.
Vocabulary Building – synonyms and antonyms, word roots, one-word substitutes, prefixes
andsuffixes, study of word origin, analogy, idioms and phrases.
Reading Comprehension – reading for facts, guessing meanings from context, scanning,
skimming, inferring meaning, Critical reading.
Writing Skills – structure and presentation of different types of writing – Resume writing /
e-correspondence/Technical report writing/Portfolio writing – planning for writing – research
abilities/data collection/organizing data/tools/analysis – improving one‘s writing.
Group Discussion – dynamics of group discussion, intervention, summarizing, modulation of
voice, body language, relevance, fluency and coherence.
Presentation Skills – Oral presentations (individual and group) through JAM sessions/seminars
and written presentations through posters/projects/reports/PPTs/e-mails/assignments etc.
Interview Skills – concept and process, pre-interview planning, opening strategies, answering
strategies, interview through tele and video-conferencing.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 121


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Minimum Requirement:
The English Language Lab shall have two parts:

i) The Computer aided Language Lab for 60 students with 60 systems, one master
console, LAN facility and English language software for self- study by learners.

ii) The Communication Skills Lab with movable chairs and audio-visual aids with a P.A System,
a T. V., a digital stereo –audio & video system and camcorder etc.

System Requirement ( Hardware component):


Computer network with Lan with minimum 60 multimedia systems with the following specifications:
i) P – IV Processor
a) Speed – 2.8 GHZ
b) RAM – 512 MB Minimum
c) Hard Disk – 80 GB
ii) Headphones of High quality
Suggested Software:
The software consisting of the prescribed topics elaborated above should be procured and used.
Suggested Software:
Clarity Pronunciation Power – part II
Oxford Advanced Learner‘s Compass, 7th Edition
DELTA‘s key to the Next Generation TOEFL Test: Advanced Skill
Practice. Lingua TOEFL CBT Insider, by Dreamtech
TOEFL & GRE( KAPLAN, AARCO & BARRONS, USA, Cracking GRE by CLIFFS)
The following software from ‗train2success.com‘
Preparing for being interviewed,
• Positive Thinking,
• Interviewing Skills,
• Telephone Skills,
• Time Management
• Team Building,
• Decision making

English in Mind, Herbert Puchta and Jeff Stranks with Meredith Levy, Cambridge
Books Recommended:
1. Technical Communication by Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta Sharma, Oxford University Press
2009.
2. Advanced Communication Skills Laboratory Manual by Sudha Rani, D, Pearson Education
2011.
3. English Language Communication : A Reader cum Lab Manual Dr A Ramakrishna Rao, Dr G
Natanam & Prof SA Sankaranarayanan, Anuradha Publications, Chennai 2008.
4. English Vocabulary in Use series, Cambridge University Press 2008.
5. Management Shapers Series by Universities Press(India)Pvt Ltd., Himayatnagar, Hyderabad
2008.
6. Communication Skills by Leena Sen, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
7. Handbook for Technical Writing by David A McMurrey & Joanne Buckely CENGAGE Learning
2008.
8. Job Hunting by Colm Downes, Cambridge University Press 2008.
9. Master Public Speaking by Anne Nicholls, JAICO Publishing House, 2006.
10. English for Technical Communication for Engineering Students, Aysha Vishwamohan, Tata
Mc Graw-Hil
2009.
11. Books on TOEFL/GRE/GMAT/CAT/ IELTS by Barron‘s/DELTA/Cambridge University Press.
12. International English for Call Centres by Barry Tomalin and Suhashini Thomas,
Macmillan Publishers, 2009.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 122


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

IV B.TECH I SEMESTER
SYLLABUS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 123


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CAD/CAM
IV B. Tech. - I Semester LTPC
Course Code: A2ME43 3 1-3

Course Overview
CAD/CAM subject is to study various aspects of computer aided design and computer aided
manufacturing. The students are able to understand various designs and purpose them in the various
fields of applications. The student would able to create part programming using cnc software in this
course. The student learns how to apply group technology and to plan about material as per master
schedule plan. This course provides theoretical as well as practical basis for understanding the
concepts of computer aided design and computer aided manufacturing.

Course Objectives

I. Know the basic idea about the computers in industrial manufacturing


II Know about computer aided graphics
III. Have knowledge about geometric modeling
IV .Know about drafting and modeling

Course Outcomes
1. Have knowledge on geometric modeling
2. They know about the geometric constructions, models, curve representation methods, surface
representation methods
3 .Have knowledge about numerical control, structure of CNC machine tools, manual part
programming methods, computer aided part programming
4. .Have knowledge on computer aided processes planning, production flow analysis.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 124


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
Computers in Industrial Manufacturing, Product cycle, CAD / CAM Hardware, Basic structure, CPU,
Memory types, input devices, display devices, hard copy devices, storage devices.
COMPUTER GRAPHICS: Raster scan graphics coordinate system, database structure for graphics
modeling, transformation of geometry, 3D transformations, mathematics of projections, clipping,
hidden surface removal.

UNIT - II
GEOMETRIC MODELING: Requirements, geometric models, geometric construction models, curve
representation methods, surface representation methods, modeling facilities desired.
DRAFTING AND MODELING SYSTEMS: Basic geometric commands, layers, display control
commands, editing, dimensioning, solid modeling.

UNIT - III
NUMERICAL CONTROL: NC, NC modes, NC elements, NC machine tools, structure of CNC
machine tools, features of Machining center, turning center, CNC Part Programming: fundamentals,
manual part programming methods, Computer Aided Part Programming.
GROUP TECH: Part family, coding and classification, production flow analysis, advantages and
limitations, Computer Aided Processes Planning, Retrieval type and Generative type.

UNIT - IV
COMPUTER AIDED QUALITY CONTROL: Terminology in quality control, the computer in QC,
contact inspection methods, non contact inspection methods-optical, non contact inspection methods-
non optical, computer aided testing, integration of CAQC with CAD/CAM.

UNIT - V
COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Types of Manufacturing systems,
Machine tools and related equipment, material handling systems, computer control systems, human
labor in the manufacturing systems, CIMS benefits.

TEXT BOOKS
1. CAD/CAM Principles and Applications, Rao P.N.
th
2. Ibrahim Zeid(2011), CAD / CAM Theory and Practice, 4 edition, Tata McGraw Hill education (P)
Ltd, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
rd
1. P.Groover(2011), Automation, Production systems and Computer integrated Manufacturing, 3
edition, Pearson Publications, India.
2. Radhakrishnan, Subramanian (2009), CAD / CAM / CIM, New Age Inetrnational Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, India.
st
3. Alavala, C. R (2012), CAD/CAM: Concepts and Applications, 1 edition, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16


Page 125
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

IV B. Tech. - I Semester LTPC


Course Code: A2ME44 3 1- 3

Course Overview
Measurement is an essential activity in every branch of science technology. The art of measurement
is a wide discipline in both engineering and science, covering the areas of detection, acquisition,
control and analysis of data. Measurement plays an important role in every branch of scientific
research and industrial processes interacting basically with the control system.
The course objective is to provide knowledge on the fundamentals of measurement science,
measuring instruments and to provide basic knowledge of control system theory.

Course Objectives
The course educational objective is to enable the students to learn the fundamentals of various
industrial instruments. The students will be able to understand the general principles of measurement
systems, transducer elements, and specialized measurement systems such as flow, temperature,
pressure and level.

Course Outcomes
Students will be conversant with measurement techniques and the use of measuring instruments will
have working knowledge for dealing with problems involving control system fundamentals.

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION: Definition , Basic principles of measurement, Measurement systems, generalized
configuration and functional descriptions of measuring instruments, examples. Dynamic performance
characteristics, sources of error, Classification and elimination of error.
MEASUREMENT OF DISPLACEMENT: Theory and construction of various transducers to measure
displacement,Piezo electric, Inductive, capacitance, resistance, ionization and Photo electric
transducers, Calibration procedures.

UNIT - II
MEASUREMENT OF PRESSURE: Units, classification, different principles used. Manometers,
Piston,Bourdon pressure gauges, Bellows, Diaphragm gauges. Low pressure measurement, Thermal
conductivity gauges, ionization pressure gauges, McLeod pressure gauge.
MEASUREMENT OF LEVEL: Direct method, Indirect methods, capacitative, ultrasonic, magnetic,
Bubler level indicators.
FLOW MEASUREMENT: Rotameter, magnetic, Ultrasonic, Turbine flow meter, Hot, wire
anemometer, Laser Doppler Anemometer (LDA).

UNIT - III
MEASUREMENT OF SPEED: Mechanical Tachometers, Electrical tachometers, Stroboscope,
Noncontact type of tachometer.
MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION AND VIBRATION: Different simple instruments, Principles of
Seismic instruments, Vibrometer and accelerometer using this principle.

UNIT - IV
STRESS STRAIN MEASUREMENTS: Various types of stress and strain measurements , electrical
strain gauge , gauge factor , method of usage of resistance strain gauge for bending compressive and
tensile strains, usage for measuring torque, Strain gauge Rosettes.
MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE: Classification , Ranges , Various Principles of measurement ,Expansion,
Electrical Resistance , Thermistor , Thermocouple , Pyrometers, Temperature Indicators.
MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 126
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT - V
MEASUREMENT OF HUMIDITY: Moisture content of gases, sling psychrometer, Absorption
psychrometer, Dew point meter.
ELEMENTS OF CONTROL SYSTEMS: Introduction, Importance, Classification, Open and closed
systems Servomechanisms, Examples with block diagrams, Temperature, speed & position control
systems.

TEXT BOOKS
1. D.S. Kumar(2011), Mechanical Measurements and Controls, 4th edition, Metropolitan Book Co. Pvt
Ltd., New Delhi, India.
2. A. K. Tayal (2004), Instrumentation and mechanical Measurements, 2nd edition, Galgotia
Publications, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Er. R. K. Jain (2011), Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, 12th edition, Khanna
Publishers, New Delhi, India.
2. Chennakesava R. Alavala(2010), Principles of Industrial Instrumentation and Control Systems, 1st
edition, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, India.
3. B. C. Nakra, K. K. Choudhary (2010), Instrumentation, measurement and analysis, 4th, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 127


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

FINITE ELEMENT METHOD


IV B. Tech. - I Semester LTPC
Course Code: A2AE26 3 1- 3

Course Overview
The aim of this course is to introduce basic principles of Numerical methods and it is further extended
to cover the application of finite element method by the inclusion of 1D bar elements truss elements
beam elements 2D elements like CST, ring elements. Nowadays the principles of finite element
method find wide applications in many engineering fields like mechanical engineering, aerospace, civil
engineering, nuclear engineering, bio mechanics etc. The course deals with the Raleigh-ritz (PMPE)
and galerkin approaches. The objective of the course is determined structural deformations strains
element stress and heat transfer problems.

Course Objectives
The objectives of the course are to enable the student;
I. Introduction of Finite Element Method (FEM) which is one of the Numerical Methods with which
solutions can be obtained for problems with complex geometries, material properties and
boundary conditions.
II. Utility of FEM as Engineering solution tool to problems (both vector and scalar) involving
Various fields for Design Analysis and Optimization.
III. Development of Mathematical Model (Governed by Differential equations) for physical problems
and concept of discretization of continuum.
IV. Ability to understand, to improve or refine the approximate solution by spending more
computational effort by using higher interpolation continuities unlike expensive
experimental methods / exact solutions.

Course Outcomes

1. An understanding of Numerical Methods and development of mathematical models for


physical system using principle of minimum potential energy / principle of Virtual Work
2. A generalized procedure f FEM comprising element attributes, types, different types of
boundary conditions and interpolation functions. (1D, 2D & 3D)
3. Application of FEM to simple bars, Trusses, Beams, Solids of Revolutions, Frequency analysis
and Heat Transfer for determining displacement / stresses induced / initial strain problems
4. FEM as a tool for Design Validation of complex physical Engineering Applications.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 128


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION TO FEM: Basic concept, historical background, application of FEM, general
description, comparison of FEM with other methods. Basic equations of elasticity, Stress, strain
relations, Strain, Displacement relations.
ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEM: Finite element modeling coordinates and shape functions. Potential
Energy approach: Assembly of Global stiffness matrix and load vector. Finite element equations,
Treatment of boundary conditions, Quadratic shape functions.

UNIT - II
ANALYSIS OF TRUSSES: Stiffness Matrix for plane truss and space truss elements, stress
calculations.
ANALYSIS OF BEAMS: Hermite shape functions-Element stiffness matrix for two nodes, two
degrees of freedom per node beam element, load vector, deflection, stresses.

UNIT - III
2-D PROBLEMS: CST-Stiffness matrix and load vector, Isoparametric element representation, Shape
functions, convergence requirements, Problems.
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING of Axisymmetric solids subjected to Axisymmetric loading with
triangular elements. Two dimensional four noded isoparametric elements and numerical
integration.

UNIT - IV
STEADY STATE HEAT TRANSFER ANALYSIS: one dimensional analysis of a fin and two
dimensional analysis of thin plate. Analysis of a uniform shaft subjected to torsion.

UNIT - V
DYNAMIC ANALYSIS: Formulation of finite element model, element matrices, Lumped and
consistent mass matrices-evaluation of Eigen values and Eigen vectors for a stepped bar and a
beam.

TEXT BOOKS
rd
1. R. Tirupathi Chandrapatla (2011), Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, 4 edition,
Pearson Education, India.

2. S.Md.Jalaludeen,Finite Element Analysis in Engineering,Anuradha Publications

REFERENCE BOOKS
st
1. Chennakesava R. Alavala (2009), Finite elements methods, 1 edition, second reprint, Prentice
Hall of India publishers, New Delhi, India.
rd
2. J. N. Reddy (2010), An introduction to Finite Element Method, 3 edition, Tata McGraw hill
education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.

3. Kenneth H. Huebner, Donald L. Dewhirst, Douglas E. Smith , Ted G. Byrom (2009), The Finite
rd
Element Method for Engineers, 3 edition, John Wiley & sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd., New York.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 129


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CAD/CAM LAB

IV B. Tech. - I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME53 -- 3 2
PART-A
CAD LAB

Course overview
This is the core course of CATIA V5. This course covers the creation of solid parts without complex
contours. Students will be introduced to the part environment of CATIA V5 and learn how to work
between the Sketcher and Part Design workbenches to create individual parts. It also covers the
various analytical and navigation tools that are available within an assembly.

Course Objectives
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to create, constrain and modify
sketches; create and modify parts; perform boolean operations on parts; integrate surfaces and apply
materials to parts. The student will be able to insert, manipulate, constrain and modify components in
an assembly; work with the links of the assembly; create parts within the assembly structure; perform
measurements, clash analyses and section analyses; create scenes and annotated views; capture
pictures and create xml files for external use and utilize all of the navigation tools.

Course Outcomes
The student can able to insert, manipulate, constrain and modify components in an assembly; work
with the links of the assembly; create parts within the assembly structure; perform measurements,
clash analyses and section analyses; create scenes and annotated views; capture pictures and create
xml files for external use and utilize all of the navigation tools.

SYLLABUS

1. DRAFTING: Development of part drawings for various components in the form of orthographic
and isometric. Representation of Dimensioning and tolerances scanning and plotting.

2. PART MODELING: Generation of various 3D Models through Protrusion, revolve, shell sweep
Creation of various features. Study of parent child relation. Feature based and Boolean based
modeling surface and Assembly Modeling. Study of various standard Translators, Design
simple components.

1. Determination of deflection and stresses in 2D and 3D trusses and beams.


2. Determination of deflections component and principal and Von-mises stresses in plane
stress, plane strain and Axisymmetric components.
3. Determination of stresses in 3D and shell structures (at least one example in each case)
4. Estimation of natural frequencies and mode shapes Harmonic response of 2D beam.
5. Steady state heat transfer Analysis of plane and Axisymmetric components.

Any Four Software Packages from the following:

Pro-E, I-DEAS, CATIA, UNIGRAPHICS, ANSYS, NISA, CAEFEM, CAM, AUTOCAD, etc.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 130


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART-B
CAM LAB

Course overview
Computer Aided Manufacturing is designed to prepare students as entry-level machinists in many
areas, including aerospace, computer industries, job shop, gun smithing, tool and die making,
Computer Numerical Control (CNC) operator, and CNC programmer. Students will study machining
processes and procedures using lathes, mills, drill presses, cylindrical grinders, and surface grinders.

Course Objectives
Basic CNC machines operations - Start-up and initialization procedure of the Victor CNC machines
including zero return and G92.
Manual operation of the CNC lathe and mill including turret indexing, tail stock motion, table motion
and tool change Manual data input. DNC Computer assisted programming for the CNC

Course Outcomes
The student can able to perform different operations on CNC lathe and CNC milling machine.

SYLLABUS

1. To perform facing operation for a given model by using CNC lathe machine
2. To perform parting-off operation for a given model by using CNC lathe machine
3. To perform step turning operation for a given model by using CNC lathe machine
4. To perform thread cutting operation for a given model by using CNC lathe machine
5. To perform different operations on CNC Milling machine.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 131


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PRODUCTION DRAWING PRACTICE & INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS LAB

PART-A
PRODUCTION DRAWING LAB

IV B. Tech. - I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME54 - 13 2

Course Overview
This course is an introduction to technical graphics and computer-aided design. The course includes
sketching, production drawing, and a significant amount of hands-on experience on a CAD system.
The production drawing portion covers topics like multi-view drawings, section views, auxiliary views
and dimensioning..
Course Objectives

Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:


I. Draw orthographic projections and section views of objects with dimensions using
standard specifications and practices
II. Learn to use CAD systems using AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor for Parametric Solid
Modeling
III. Produce engineering drawings and models using AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor.

Course Outcomes

1. Students can able to do the 2 D drafting


2. Students can able to do dimensioning for various drawings.
3. Students can able to do various geometrical tolerances

SYLLABUS

UNIT – I
Conventional representation of Materials – conventional representation of parts – screw joints, welded
joints, springs, gears, electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic circuits – methods of indicating notes on
drawings.

UNIT – II
Limits and Fits : Types of fits, exercises involving selection / interpretation of fits and estimation of
limits from tables.

UNIT – III
Form and Positional Tolerances : Introduction and indication of the tolerances of from and position on
drawings, deformation of runout and total runout and their indication.

UNIT – IV
Surface roughness and its indication : Definitions – finishes obtainable from various manufacturing
processes, recommended surface roughness on mechanical components.
Heat treatment and surface treatment symbols used on drawings.

UNIT – V
Detailed and Part drawings: Drawing of parts from assembly drawings with indications of size,
tolerances, roughness, form and position errors etc.
Part drawing using computer aided drafting by CAD software

TEXT BOOKS
1. Production and Drawing – K.L. Narayana & P. Kannaiah/ New Age
2. machine Drawing with Auto CAD- Pohit and Ghosh, PE
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing- James D. Meadows/ B.S Publications
2. Engineering Metrology, R.K. Jain, Khanna Publications

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 132


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART-B
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS LAB
IV B. Tech. - I Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME54 - 13 2

Course Overview
Calibration of pressure gauges, calibration of;resistance temperature detector for temperature
measurement, thermister and rtd, thermocouple for temperature measurement, vibration setup,
calibration of photo and magnetic speed pickups for the measurement of speed , measurement of
angular displacement using capacitive transducer , measurment of strain gauge ,study and calibration
of lvdt tranducer for displacement measurement ,study and calibration of mcleod gauge for low
pressure.

Course Objectives
I. students can learn various control systems
II. students can able to do the vibration setup

Course Outcomes
1. students can learn measurment of strain gauge
2. students can able to do measurement of angular displacement using capacitive transducer

SYLLABUS

1. Calibration of Pressire Gauges


2. Calibration of transducer for temperature measurement.
3. Study and calibration of LVDT transducer for displacement measurement.
4. Calibrationof strain gauge for temperature measurement.
5. Calibration of thermocouple for temperature measurement.
6. Calibration of capacitive transducer for angular displacement.
7. Study and calibration of photo and magnetic speed pickups for the measurement of speed.
8. Calibration of resistance temperature detector for temperature measurement.
9. Study and calibration of a rotometer for flow measurement.
10. Study and use of a Seismic pickup for the measurement of vibration amplitude of an engine bed at
various loads.
11. Study and calibration of Mcleod gauge for low pressure.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 133


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COMPOSITE MATERIALS LAB


IV B. Tech. - I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME55 - -3 2

Students should be enabled to:


  Identify different types of Fibers, Matrix Materials (Polymers and Metals) 
  Acquire knowledge on Safe storage and handling of the materials 
  Have a knowledge of consumables 
 Design simple molds ( out of metals and composites) to realize flat composite
 laminates 
 Lay-up procedures for uniform dispersion of resin on woven reinforcement
 fabrics and chopped strand mats 
  Learn techniques of preparing unidirectional reinforcements 
  Learn the preparation of specially orthotropic lamina 
  Learn the lay-up of angled plied laminates 
  Learn the basics of hybrid composites 
  Learn to prepare a quasi-isotropic composite laminate 
 Study and learn the relevant ASTM specifications for evaluating the mechanical 
properties of composites
Course Outcomes:
 Professional approach to fabricate and evaluate composite specimens for mechanical
 properties 
 Selection of material systems for specific applications 
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Fabrication of a laminated composite flat plate specimen by hand lay-up using
a. Woven cloth
b. UD fabric
c. Chopped strand mat
2. Conducting uni-axial tensile test to determine σu, ϵ1, E1 on flat rectangular
specimens of
a. Glass epoxy
b. Glass polyester
o
3. Conducting Uni-axial tensile test on a ±45 specimen to determine τ12 and G12
4. Conducting a compression test on short gauge length specimens
5. Estimating the volume fractions for Glass fibre composite specimen
6. Determining the Barcol Hardness of composites to assess the state of cross linking of
the polymer matrix
7. Fabrication of composite tubes by tube rolling
8. Impact properties of composite notched and un-notched specimens of
different material systems
9. Ultrasonic testing of GFRP composite specimens for detecting flaws
10. Preparation of metal matrix composites using stir casting machine.
11. Determine the mechanical properties of metal matrix composites.
12. Study of ceramic matrix composites.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 134


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

IV B.TECH II SEMESTER
SYLLABUS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 135


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

IV B. Tech. - II Semester LTPC


Course Code: A2ME38 3 1- 3

Course Overview
This course is intended to introduce structural and operational details of automobile and its systems.
Major systems are fuel supply, cooling, ignition, electrical, transmission, suspension, braking and
steering. Transport of personnel and goods play an important roll in the economy of country and
standard of living. Lakhs of vehicles running crosses of kilometers. So the man power is required to
manufacture and maintain all these vehicles. After completion of this course the student‘s gains
adequate knowledge either to work in manufacturing or maintenance sector of automobiles.

Course Objective
I. To understand the concept on working principles of various systems involved for study of auto
mobiles.
II. Improves analytical skills in finding the engineering solutions in global environmental
social contexts.
III. Improves ability to understand the different types of engines and automobile bodies.
IV. By using resources at optimum level in order to achieve the better efficiency in system
of automobile duly reducing operational losses
V. Develops an idea of utilization of resources duly reducing emission levels for achieving eco-
friendly environment.

Course Outcomes
1. Systematically use a range of calculation methods to formulate an overall concept and
detailed design of components, assemblies and systems for road vehicles, to satisfy
ergonomic, safety, structural integrity and performance requirements.
2. Critically assess the mechanical design of automotive chassis components using hand
calculations, solid body modeling and the finite element method.
3. Undertake a range of thermodynamic and combustion calculations, supported by detailed
knowledge of fuel properties and the combustion process in spark ignition and diesel engines.
4. Analyze the vehicle handling behavior for driver inputs and the ride response due to road
surface irregularities, evaluate modern control systems used in engine management, power
train, brake and suspension systems.
5. Critically evaluate current research and advanced scholarship in aspects of automotive
engineering as a result of the personal thesis project study, apply knowledge of vehicle
refinement.
6. Demonstrate self-direction and originality in planning and implementing tasks at professional
or equivalent level.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 136


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION : Components of four wheeler automobile , chassis and body , power unit , power
transmission , rear wheel drive, front wheel drive, 4 wheel drive , types of automobile engines, engine
construction, turbo charging and super charging , engine lubrication, splash and pressure lubrication
systems, oil filters, oil pumps , crank case ventilation , engine service, reboring, decarbonisation,
Nitriding of crank shaft..

UNIT - II
FUEL SYSTEM: S.I. Engine: Fuel supply systems, Mechanical and electrical fuel pump, filters,
carburettor, types, air filters, petrol injection.
C.I. ENGINES: Requirements of diesel injection systems, types of injection systems, fuel pump,
nozzle, spray formation, injection timing, testing of fuel pumps. Emission from Automobiles, Pollution
standards National and international, Pollution Control, Techniques, Multipoint fuel injection for SI
Engines.

UNIT - III
COOLING SYSTEM : Cooling Requirements, Air Cooling, Liquid Cooling, Thermo, water and Forced
Circulation System ,Radiators , Types , Cooling Fan - water pump, thermostat, evaporating cooling ,
pressure sealed cooling , antifreeze solutions.
IGNITION SYSTEM: Function of an ignition system, battery ignition system, constructional features of
storage, battery, auto transformer, contact breaker points, condenser and spark plug, Magneto coil
ignition system, electronic ignition system using contact breaker, electronic ignition using contact
triggers, spark advance and retard mechanism.

UNIT - IV
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Clutches, principle, types, cone clutch, single plate clutch, multi plate
clutch, magnetic and centrifugal clutches, fluid fly wheel, gear boxes, types, sliding mesh, construct
mesh, synchro mesh gear boxes, epicyclic gear box, over drive torque converter. Propeller shaft ,
Hotch , Kiss drive, Torque tube drive, universal joint, differential rear axles , types , wheels and tiers.
BRAKING SYSTEM: Mechanical brake system, Hydraulic brake system, Master cylinder, wheel
cylinder tandem master cylinder Requirement of brake fluid, Pneumatic and vacuum brakes

UNIT - V
STEERING SYSTEM: Steering geometry, camber, castor, king pin rake, combined angle toein, center
point steering. Types of steering mechanism , Ackerman steering mechanism, Davis steering
mechanism, steering gears , types, steering linkages.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Objects of suspension systems, rigid axle suspension system, torsion bar,
shock absorber, Independent suspension system.

TEXT BOOKS
th
1. Kirpal Singh (2012), Automobile Engineering - Vol. 1 &2, 12 edition, standard publishers, New
Delhi, India.
th
2. William Crouse (2012), Automobile Engineering (SIE), 10 edition, Tata McGraw hill education
(P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS
th
1. B. S. Narang (2011), Automobile Engineering, 5 edition, Karman publishers, New Delhi, India.
2. J. B. Gupta (2012), Automobile Engineering, satya prakhashan, New Delhi, India.
3. A Text book Automobile Engineering, Rajput

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 137


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OPEN ELECTIVES
OFFERED BY MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OPEN ELECTIVES

O E- I OE-II OE-III

Fundamentals of Fundamentals of A2ME46 Introduction to


A2ME25 Mechatronics A2ME34 Operation Research Material Handling
A2ME26 Basics of A2ME35 Economics for Engineers A2ME47 Non-Conventional
Thermodynamics Energy Sources
Fundamentals of A2ME48 Aspects of Heat &
A2ME27 Engineering Materials A2ME36 Basics of Robotics Mass Transfer

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 138


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

FUNDAMENTAL OF MECHATRONICS
(OPEN ELECTIVE – I)

III B. Tech. - I Semester L T P C


Course Code: A2ME25 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
Introduction to mechatronics with emphasis on analog electronics, digital electronics, sensors and
transducers, actuators, and microprocessors. Lectures are intended to provide the student with
foundational concepts in mechatronics and practical familiarity with common elements making up
mechatronic systems. Laboratory experiments are designed to give the student hands-on experience
with components and measurement equipment used in the design of mechatronic products. (3units;
lecture/lab)

Course Objectives
The goals of this course are to help you:
I. Develop an understanding of the basic elements underlying mechatronic systems: analog
electronics, digital electronics, sensors, actuators, microcontrollers, and embedded software.
II. Understand how to interface electromechanical systems to microcontrollers.
III. Gain hands-on experience with commonly used electronic test and measurement instrumentation.
IV. Improve written communication skills through laboratory and project reports.
V. Gain practical experience in applying knowledge gained in the course through a hands-on project.

Course Outcomes
The student who successfully completes the course will be able to:
1. Articulate what the essence of mechatronics is and provide examples of mechatronic systems.
2. Explain the concepts of input and output impedance, voltage division, and circuit loading
3. Explain the concept and characteristics of a signal source.
4. Design and analyze the performance of RC low-pass and high-pass filter circuits.
5. Explain the basic structure of a microcontroller, the nature of IO ports, and the common
peripheral subsystems found in most microcontrollers.
6. Write embedded software to successfully interact with sensors, power interfaces, analog and
digital IO ports, and other peripheral elements in the control of a mechatronic system.
7. Explain what analog-to-digital-conversion (A/D) is and how to implement it using a
microcontroller.
8. Select and configure operational amplifier circuits to achieve desired interfacing requirements
between a signal source and a downstream device such as a microcontroller or data
acquisition system.
9. Explain the practical limitations of operational amplifiers and quantitatively estimate the effects
of these limitations on output voltage and current of the op-amp.
10. Explain the basic operation of bipolar and MOS field-effect transistors and design with them to
activate solenoids, relays, motors, etc. from signal sources.
11. Explain the input/output characteristics of digital logic devices and design a logic circuit to
accomplish a given task.
12. Explain the underlying operational principles and construction of electromagnetic actuators
such as DC, AC, and stepping motors.
13. Determine the torque and speed requirements for a given motion control application
considering system inertia, external forces or torques, and motion profiles and select an
appropriate motor.
14. Function effectively as part of a team in carrying out laboratory experiments and open-
ended projects.
15. Document a laboratory experiment and open-ended projects clearly and completely in written
form.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 139


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT- I
Introduction to Mechatronics Introduction to Mechatronics – Conventional and Mechatronics approach
in designing products - Mechatronics design process - Mechatronics in Manufacturing – Adoptive and
distributed control systems – Modeling and simulation of mechatronics systems.

UNIT -II
Sensors and actuators Overview of sensors and transducers – Microsensors - Signal conditioning –
Operational amplifiers – Protection – Filtering - Analog and Digital converters. Electro – pneumatics
and Electro – hydraulics - Solenoids – Direct Current motors – Servomotors – Stepper motors - Micro
actuators; Drives selection and application.

UNIT- III
Microprocessor based Controllers Architecture of microprocessor and microcontroller – System
interfacing for a sensor, keyboard, display and motors - Application cases for temperature control,
warning and process control systems.

UNIT- IV
Programmable Logic Controllers Architecture of Programmable Logic Controllers – Input/Output
modules – programming methods – Timers and counters – Master control – Branching – Data
handling – Analog input/output – Selection of PLC and troubleshooting.

UNIT- V
Intelligent Mechatronics and Case Studies Fuzzy logic control and Artificial Neural Networks in
mechatronics – Algorithms – Computer – based instrumentation - Real -time Data Acquisition and
Control – Software integration - ManMachine interface -Vision system – Mechatronics system case
studies.

TEXT BOOKS
1.Bolton .W, (2008), Mechatronics, 4rd Edition, Pearson Education.
2. B.P. Singh (2002), ―Advanced Microprocessor and Microcontrollers‖, New Age International
Publisher.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. DevdasShetty, Richard A. Kolk (2011), ―Mechatronics System Design‖, PWS Publishing Company.
2. Dan Necsulescu, (2002), ―Mechatronics‖, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education.
3. Michael B. Histand and David G. Alciatore (2005), ―Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems‖, McGraw-Hill.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 140


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

BASICS OF THERMODYNAMICS
(OPEN ELECTIVE-I)

III B. Tech. - I Semester L T P C


Course Code: A2ME26 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
Course Overview: Thermodynamics is the field of physics that deals with the relationship between
heat and work in a substance during a thermodynamic process. Specifically, thermodynamics focuses
largely on how a heat transfer is related to various energy changes within a physical system
undergoing a thermodynamic process. Such processes usually result in work being done by the
system and are guided by the laws of thermodynamics.viz Laws of Thermodynamics: Zeroth Law of
Thermodynamics-Two systems each in thermal equilibrium with a third system are in thermal
equilibrium to each other. First Law of Thermodynamics - The change in the energy of a system is the
amount of energy added to the system minus the energy spent doing work. Second Law of
Thermodynamics - It is impossible for a process to have as its sole result the transfer of heat from a
cooler body to a hotter one. Third Law of Thermodynamics - It is impossible to reduce any system to
absolute zero in a finite series of operations. This means that a perfectly efficient heat engine cannot
be created. Power cycles and refrigeration cycle based on thermodynamic system is studied.
Course Objectives
I. To get the basic concepts of thermodynamics, temperature measurement ,first law and also
ability to determine the heat , work in various flow & non-flow processes.
II. To gain the knowledge about second law of thermodynamics and determine the change in
entropy, availability in various processes.
III. To get the knowledge various phases of pure substance and calculate its properties using
steam tables and to determine properties of perfect gases in various processes.
IV. To develop to learn the concepts of mixture of gases and to calculate the property values
during a any process.
V. To get the knowledge about the working of different types of cycles and their performance

Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate knowledge of energy transfer and work done and heat equation in different
processes, power cycles and thermodynamic laws.
2. Demonstrate knowledge of ability to identify & apply fundamentals to solve problems like
system properties, amount of work transfer and heat during various processes, steam
properties at different temperatures and pressures using steam tables.
3. Demonstrate their knowledge & ability to design the thermal related components in various
fields of energy transfer equipments.
4. An ability to design a system, component or process to meet desired needs within realistic
constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, and safety
manufacturability and sustainability related thermal fields like I.C engines, different types of
power plants etc.
5. The ability to use modern engineering tools, software and equipment to analyze energy
transfer in required applications.
6. A knowledge of impact of engineering solutions on the society and also on contemporary
issues related to different types of power cycles.
7. Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in self education and life-long learning.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 141


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION: Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe,
Types of Systems, Macroscopic and Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of Continuum, Thermodynamic
Equilibrium, State, Property, Process, Cycle, Reversibility, Quasi static Process, Irreversible Process,
Causes of Irreversibility, Various flow and non flow processes, Energy in State and in Transition,
Types-Work and Heat, Point and Path function, 0 th Law of Thermodynamics, Concept of quality of
Temperature, Principles of Thermometry, Reference Points, Constant Volume gas Thermometer,
Ideal Gas Scale, PMMI - Joule‘s Experiments, First law of Thermodynamics, Corollaries First law
applied to a Process, Applied to a flow system, Steady Flow Energy Equation.

UNIT - II
LIMITATIONS OF THE FIRST LAW: Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat pump, Parameters of
performance, Second Law of Thermodynamics, Kelvin Planck and Clausius Statements and their
Equivalence / Corollaries, PMM of Second kind, Carnot‘s principle, Carnot cycle and its specialties,
Thermodynamic scale of Temperature, Clausius Inequality, Entropy, Principle of Entropy Increase,
Availability and Irreversibility, Thermodynamic Potentials, Gibbs and Helmholtz Functions, Maxwell
Relations, Elementary Treatment of the Third Law of Thermodynamics.

UNIT - III
PURE SUBSTANCES: Phase Transformations, T-S and h-s diagrams, P-V-T- surfaces, Triple point at
critical state properties during change of phase, Dryness Fraction, Mollier charts, Various
Thermodynamic processes and energy Transfer, Steam Calorimetry. PERFECT GAS LAWS:
Equation of State, Specific and Universal Gas constants, Throttling and Free Expansion Processes,
Deviations from perfect Gas Model, Vander Waals Equation of State.

UNIT - IV
MIXTURES OF PERFECT GASES: Mole Fraction, Mass friction, Gravimetric and volumetric Analysis,
Volume fraction, Dalton‘s Law of partial pressure, Avogadro‘s Laws of additive volumes, and partial
pressure, Equivalent Gas constant, Internal Energy, Enthalpy, sp. Heats and Entropy of Mixture of
perfect Gases .

UNIT - V
POWER CYCLES: Otto, Diesel, Dual Combustion cycles, Description and representation on PV and
T-S diagram, Thermal Efficiency, Mean Effective Pressures on Air standard basis, comparison of
Cycles, Introduction to Brayton cycle and Bell Coleman cycle.

TEXT BOOKS
1. P. K. Nag (2008,Third Reprint), Engineering Thermodynamics, 4th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, India.
2. Yunus Cengel, Boles (2011), Thermodynamics - An Engineering Approach, 7 th edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. J. B. Jones, R. E. Dugan (2009), Engineering Thermodynamics, 1st edition, Prentice Hall of India
Learning, New Delhi, India.
2. Y. V. C. Rao (2013), An introduction to Thermodynamics, 3rd Edition, Universities Press,
Hyderabad, India.
3. K. Ramakrishna (2011), Engineering Thermodynamics, 2nd edition, Anuradha Publishers, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 142


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

FUNDAMENTALS OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS


(OPEN ELECTIVE-I)

III B. Tech. - I Semester L T P C


Course Code: A2ME27 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
The aim is to introduce students the overview of the properties of materials used in engineering
manufacturing process. The course covers basic concept of ferrous, non-ferrous metals and its alloys.
It emphasizes on transformation of iron at various temperatures. It briefly describe the heat treatment
given to iron and its alloys. It gives the general overview idea of composite materials.

Course Objectives
This course has the basic idea of the properties of steal and ferrous metals. The objectives aim
to: I. Identify the basic crystalline structure of steal.
II. Understand the concept of TTT.
III. Describe the various heat treatment methods to obtain the desired
properties. IV. Describe the composition of carbon contents in steel.
V. Analyze the different forms of iron obtained during heating of steel.
VI. Understand the properties of non-ferrous alloys.
VII. Understand requirement.

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the students are able to:

1 This subject gives student a technical knowledge about behavior of matals.


2 Identify the crystalline structure of steel.
3 Understand the theory of time temperature and transformation.
4 Determination of different uses of heat treatment in steel.
5 Distinguish between the various forms of steel.
6 Understand the properties of non-ferrous alloys.
7 Describe the various uses of composite materials..

SYLLABUS
UNIT – I
STRUCTURE OF METALS: Crystallography, Miller‘s indices, Packing Efficiency, Density calculations.
Grains and Grain Boundaries. Effect of grain size on the properties. Determination of grain size by
different methods. Constitution of Alloys: Necessity of alloying, Types of solid solutions, Hume - Rothery
rules, Intermediate alloy phases.

UNIT –II
PHASE DIAGRAMS: Construction and interpretation of phase diagrams, Phase rule. Lever rule. Binary
phase Diagrams, Isomorphous, Eutectic and Eutectoid transformations with examples. UNIT –III
STEELS: Iron-Carbon Phase Diagram and Heat Treatment: Study of Fe-Fe3C phase diagram.
Construction of TTT diagrams. Annealing, Normalizing, Hardening and Tempering of steels,
Hardenability. Alloy steels.

UNIT –III
CAST IRONS: Structure and properties of White Cast iron, Malleable Cast iron, Grey cast iron.
Engineering Materials-III: Non-ferrous Metals and Alloys: Structure and properties of copper and its
alloys, Aluminium and its alloys, Al-Cu phase diagram, Titanium and its alloys.

UNIT – IV
CERAMICS, POLYMERS AND COMPOSITES: Crystalline ceramics, glasses, cermets: structure,
properties and applications. Classification, properties and applications of composites. Classification,
Properties and applications of Polymers.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 143


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1. Material Science and Metallurgy/ Kodgire
2. Essentials of Materials Science and engineering / Donald R.Askeland / Thomson.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy / Sidney H. Avner.
2. Materials Science and engineering / William and callister.
3. Elements of Material science / V. Rahghavan

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 144


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATION RESEARCH


(OPEN ELECTIVE-II)

III B. Tech. - II Semester L T P C


Course Code: A2ME34 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
Operation Research facilitates the comparison of every possible alternatives (courses of action or
acts) to know the potential outcomes, permits examination of the sensitivity of the solution to changes
or errors in numerical values, and encourage rational decision-making based on the best available
approaches or techniques.
Course Objectives
I. The objectives of the course are to enable the student; I. Explain optimum utilization of
resources, effort and implement the decision effectively.
II. Understand scientific systematic approach involved and provide a good intellectual support
for decision making.
III. Discuss substantial experience in taking timely management decisions and for corrective
measures.
IV. Analyzing the behavior of the system for the purpose of improving its performance.
V. Demonstrate reliability of solution obtained from a model depends on the validity of the model
in representing the real systems.
VI. Generate solutions for the problems, what method should be adopted so that the total cost is
minimum or total profit maximum.

Course Outcomes
After completing this course the student must demonstrate the knowledge and ability to:
1. Applying a different linear programming problem technique which has a broad experience in
finding the optimum profit.
2. Apply the knowledge of the course in solving real life problems.
3. Identify areas for research-oriented work based on the course content.
4. Calculate the knowledge that tries to optimize total return by maximizing the profit and
minimizing the cost or loss.
5. Recognize the best (optimum) decisions relative to largest possible portion of the total
organization.
6. Discuss towards the development of better working procedure and systematic approach in
problem analysis, modeling and implementation of solutions at the workplace.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 145


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT- I
Linear Programming-Simplex methods, primal 8 & dual problem sensitivity analysis.

UNIT- II
Transportation & Assignment problems. Dynamic Programming-Multistage decision 8 problems &
solution, Principle of optimality.

UNIT- III
Decision theory-Decision under various conditions. Game Theory-Minimum & maximum 8 strategies.
Application of linear programming.

UNIT- IV
Stochastic inventory models-Single & multi period models with continuous & discrete 8 demands.

UNIT- V
Simulations-Monte Carlo simulation, generation of random numbers & simulation 8 languages.
Queuing models-M.M.1 & M/M/S system cost consideration

TEXT BOOKS
1 H.A.Taha, ―Operations Research ", Prentice Hall of India, 1999, Sixth Edition.
2 S.Bhaskar, ―Operations Research ", Anuradha Publishers, Tamil Nadu, 1999

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. M.J. Bazara, Jarvis, H. Sherali, " Linear Programming and Network Flows ", John Wiley, 1990
2.Philip and Ravindran, ―Operational Research ", John Wiley, 1992
3.Hillier and Lieberman, ―Operations Research ", Holden Day, 1986

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 146


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ECONOMICS FOR ENGINEERS


(OPEN ELECTIVE-II)

III B. Tech. - II Semester LT P C


Course Code: A2ME35 31 - 3

Course Overview
Provide a broad based introduction to economics for engineers with a micro environment in which
markets operate how price determination is done under different kinds of competitions. Financial
Analysis gives clear idea about concepts, conventions and accounting procedures along with
introducing students to fundamentals of ratio analysis and interpretation of financial statements.

Course Objectives
To enable the student to understand and appreciate,with a practical insight,the importance of certain
basic issues governing the business operations namely:demand and supply,production function,cost
analysis,markets,forms of business organisations,capital budgeting and financial accounting and
financial analysis.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course,the student will understand the market dynamics namely,demand and
supply,demand forecasting,elasticity of demand and supply,pricing methods and pricing in different
market structures.

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION & DEMAND ANALYSIS : Definition, Nature and Scope of Managerial Economics.
Demand Analysis: Demand Determinants, Law of Demand and its exceptions. Elasticity of Demand:
Definition, Types, Measurement and Significance of Elasticity of Demand. Demand Forecasting,
Factors governing demand forecasting, methods of demand forecasting.

UNIT-II
PRODUCTION & COST ANALYSIS: Production Function— lsoquants and lsocosts, MRTS, Least
Cost Combination of Inputs, Cobb-Douglas Production function, Laws of Returns, Internal and
External Econornie's of Scale. Cost Analysis: Cost concepts. Break-even Analysis (BEA)-
Determination o7 Break-Even Point (simple problems) - Managerial Significance.
UNIT-III
MARKETS & NEW ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT: Types of competition and Markets, Features of
Perfect competition, Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition. Price-Output Determination in case of
Perfect Competition and Monopoly. Pricing: Objectives and Policies of Pricing. Methods of Pricing.
Business: Features and evaluation of different forms of Business Organisation: Sole Proprietorship,
Partnership, Joint Stock Company, Public Enterprises and their types, New Economic Environment:
Changing Business Environment in Post-liberalization scenario.

UNIT-IV
CAPITAL BUDGETING: Capital and its significance, Types of Capital, Estimation of Fixed and
Working capital requirements. Methods and sources of raising capital - Trading Forecast, Capital
Budget, Cash Budget. Capital Budgeting: features of capital budgeting proposals. Methods of Capital
Budgeting: Payback Method, Accounting Rate of Return (ARR) and Net Present Value Method
(Simple Problems)

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 147


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT-V
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING & FINANCIAL ANALYSIS: Accounting concepts
and Conventions - IntrodOction IFRS Double-Entry Book Keeping' Journal, Ledger, Trial Balance-
Final Accounts (Trading Account, Profit ar;( Loss Account and Balance Sheet with simple
adjustments). Financief Analysis: Analysis and Interpretation of Liquidity Ratios, Activity Ratios, ana
Capital structure Ratios and Profitability ratios. Du Pont Chart.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Varshney 8, Maheswari: Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand, 2009


2. S.A. Siddiqui &A.8. Siddiqui, Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, New Age
international Publishers Hyderabad 2013
3. M. Kasi Reddy & Saraswathi, Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis: PHI New Delhi, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Ambrish Gupta, Financial Accounting for Management, Pearson Education, New Delhi.2012.
2. H. Craig Peterson & W. Cris Lewis, Managerial Economics, Pearson, 2012.
3. Lipsey & Chrystel, Economics, Oxford University Press, 2012
4 . Domnick Salvatore: Managerial Economics in a Global Economy, Thomson, 2012, 5
5. Narayanaswamy: Financial Accounting—A Managerial Perspective, Pearson, 2012.
6. S.N.Maheswari & S./K. Maheswari„ Financial Accounting, Vikas, 2012.
7. Truet and Truet: Managerial Economics: Analysis, Problems and Cases. Wiley, 2012.
8. Dwivedi: Managerial Economics, Vikas, 2012.
9. Shailaja & Usha MEFA, University Press, 2012,
10. Aryasri: Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, TMH, 201.2.
11. Vijay Kumar & Appa Rao, Managerial Economics & Financial AnalYs6 Cengage 2011.
12. J. V. Prabhakar Rao & F!\( Rao. Managerial Economics & Financial Analysis, Maruthi
Publishers, 2011,

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 148


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

BASICS OF ROBOTICS
(OPEN ELECTIVE-II)
III B. Tech. - II Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME36 31 - 3

Course Overview
To provide a basic understanding of the wide range of activities encompassed by personnel working
in standards and calibration laboratories. It covers the measurement process, types and correct use of
measurement and test equipment, and measurement standards. It provides an opportunity for
students to learn about measurement uncertainty and risk analysis. The course includes the
procedures necessary to set up and to have knowledge on calibration. At the end of

Course objectives
I. To be familiar with the different instruments those are available for linear, angular, roundness and
roughness measurements.
II. To be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc.)
III. It is the aim of this course to provide students with practical skills associated with each of these
areas. Metrology activities include precision measurement of component features, form and
geometry utilizing specialized measuring instruments and equipment.
Effectively designing product processing methods

Course Outcomes
1. Graduates will demonstrate basic knowledge in mathematics, science and engineering
2. Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of their professional and ethical responsibilities
3. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to function on engineering and science laboratory
teams, as well as on multidisciplinary design teams
4. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to identify, formulate and solve mechanical engineering
problems
5. Graduates will have the confidence to apply engineering solutions in global and societal
contexts. Graduates should be capable of self-education and clearly understand the value of
life-long learning. Graduates will have ability to communicate in written, oral and graphical
forms.
SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION: Automation and Robotics. An Over view of Robotics. Classification by coordinate
system and control systems. Components of the Industrial robotics: Degrees of freedomend effectors:
Mechanical gripper. Magnetic. Vacuum and other types of grippers. General consideration on gripper
selection and design

UNIT – II
MOTION ANALYSIS: Basic rotation matrices. Composite rotation matrices. Euler Angles. Equivalent
angle and Axis. Homogeneous transformation. Problems.

UNIT - III MANIPULATOR KINEMATICS :


D-H notations. Joint coordinates and world coordinates. Forward and inverse kinematics. Problems.

UNIT-IV
ROBOT ACTUATORS AND FEED BACK COMPONENTS : Actuators: Pneumatic and Hydraulic
actuators, Electric Actuators, DC servo motors, stepper motors. Feedback Components: Position
Sensors, Potentiometers. Resolves and encoders

UNIT-V
ROBOT APPLICATION IN MANUFACTURING: Material handling. Assembly and Inspection.

TEXT BOOKS
1: Industrial Robotics / Groover M P/Pearson Edu.
2: Introduction to Robotic Mechanics and Control by JJ Craig, Pearson,3rd edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1: Robotics and Control / Mittal RK & Nagrath I J/TMH
2.Robotics/ Fung 3. Robotics Engineering/ Klaftez Richard D
INTRODUCTION TO MATERIALS HANDLING

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 149


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(Open Elective – III)

IV B. Tech. - I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME46 3 - - 3

Course Overview
Course covers a systems approach to managing activities associated with traffic, transportation,
inventory management, warehousing, packaging, order processing, and materials handling.This
course is designed to give students a comprehensive understanding of the issues involved in the
design of an industrial production system. It will cover the problems in plant location, product analysis,
process design, equipment selection, materials handling, and plant layout.

Course Objectives
I. To develop competency for system visualization and design.
II. To enable student to design cylinders and pressure vessels and to use IS code.
III. To enable student select materials and to design internal engine components.
IV. To introduce student to optimum design and use optimization methods to design mechanical
components.
V. To enable student to design machine tool gearbox.
VI. To enable student to design material handling systems.
VII. Ability to apply the statistical considerations in design and analyze the defects and failure
modes in
Course Outcomes

1. Demonstrate ability to successfully complete Fork Lift Certification to safely and effectively
operate in the manufacturing environment.
2. Demonstrate proficiency in supply chain operations, utilizing appropriate methods to plan and
implement processes necessary for the purchase and conveyance of goods in a timely and
cost-effective manner
3. It explains about the different types of material handling, advantages and disadvantages. It
also suggests the selection procedure for the material handlinng along with its specifications.
4. Need for Material handling also explained with different techniques like Automated Material
handling Design Program, Computerized material handling Planning will be dealt.
5. The Material handling are explained with models, selection procedure of material handling is
depending on different function oriented systems.This also related with plant layout by which
the minimization of the handling charges will come down.
6. The ergonomics related to material handling equipment about design and
miscellaneous equipments.

UNIT – I
Types of intraplant transporting facility, principal groups of material handling equipments, choice of
material handling equipment, hoisting equipment, screw type, hydraulic and pneumatic conveyors,
general characteristics of hoisting machines, surface and overhead equipments, general
characteristics of surface and overhead equipments and their applications. Introduction to control of
hoisting equipments.

UNIT – II
Flexible hoisting appliances like ropes and chains, welded load chains, roller chains, selection of
chains hemp rope and steel wire rope, selection of ropes, fastening of hain sand ropes , different
types of load suspension appliances, fixed and movable pulleys, different types of pulley systems,
multiple pulley systems . Chain and rope sheaves and sprockets.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 150


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT – III
Load handling attachments, standard forged hook, hook weights, hook bearings, cross piece and
casing of hook, crane grab for unit and piece loads, carrier beams and clamps, load platforms and
side dump buckets, electric lifting magnets, grabbing attachments for loose materials, crane
attachments for handling liquid materials.

UNIT – IV
Arresting gear, ratchet type arresting gear, roller ratchet, shoe brakes and its different types like
electromagnetic, double shoe type, thruster operated, controller brakes, shoe brakes, thermal
calculations of shoe brakes and life of linings, safety handles, load operated constant force and
variable force brakes general theory of band brakes, its types and construction.

UNIT – V
Different drives of hosting gears like individual and common motor drive for several mechanisms,
traveling gear, traveling mechanisms for moving trolleys and cranes on runway rails, mechanisms for
trackless, rubber-tyred and crawler cranes motor propelled trolley hoists and trolleys, rails and
traveling wheels, slewing, jib and luffing gears. Operation of hoisting gear during transient motion,
selecting the motor rating and determining braking torque for hoisting mechanisms, drive efficiency
calculations, selecting the motor rating and determining braking torque for traveling mechanisms,
slewing mechanisms, jib and luffing mechanisms . (Elementary treatment is expected)

TEXT BOOKS

1. Materials Handling Equipment – N. Rudenko , Envee Publishers, New Delhi


2. Materials Handling Equipment – M.P. Alexandrov. Mie publications, Maskow

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Aspects of Material handling - Arora


2. Introduction to Material Handling- Ray
3. Plant Layout and Material Handling- Chowdary RB

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 151


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY SOURCES


(OPEN ELECTIVE – III)

IV B. Tech. - I Semester L T PC
Course Code: A2ME47 3 - - 3

Course Overview
Non Conventional resources include solar energy, wind, falling water, the heat of the earth
(geothermal), plant materials (biomass), waves, ocean currents, temperature differences in the
oceans and the energy of the tides. Non Conventional energy technologies produce power, heat or
mechanical energy by converting those resources either to electricity orto motive power. The policy
maker concerned with development of the national grid system will focus on those resources that
have established themselves commercially and are cost effective for on grid applications. Such
commercial technologies include hydroelectric power, solar energy, fuels derived from biomass, wind
energy and geothermal energy. Wave, ocean current, ocean thermal and other technologies that are
in the research or early commercial stage, as well as non-electric Non Conventional energy
technologies, such as solar water heaters and geothermal heat pumps, are also based on Non
Conventional resources, but outside the scope of this Manual.

Course Objectives

I. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to use basic knowledge in mathematics, science and
engineering and apply them to solve problems specific to mechanical engineering
(Fundamental engineering analysis skills).
II. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design and conduct experiments, interpret and
analyze data, and report results (Information retrieval skills).
III. Graduates should be capable of self-education and clearly understand the value of life-long
learning (Continuing education awareness).
IV. Graduates will develop an open mind and have an understanding of the impact of engineering
on society and demonstrate awareness of contemporary issues (Socialawareness).
V. Graduate will be able to design a system to meet desired needs within environmental,
economic, political, ethical health and safety, manufacturability and management knowledge
and techniques to estimate time, resources to complete project (Practical engineering
analysis skills).

Course Outcomes

1. Introduction to Renewable Energy Sources,Principles of Solar Radiation, Different Methods of


Solar Energy Storage and its Applications,Concepts of Solar Ponds, Solar Distillation and
Photo Voltaic Energy Conversion
2. Introduction to Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors ,Classification of Concentrating
Collectors
3. Introduction to Wind Energy,Horizontal and Vertical Access Wind Mills, Bio-Conversion
4. Types of Bio-Gas Digesters andUtilization for Cooking Geothermal Energy Resources
5. Types of Wells and Methods of Harnessing the Energy,Ocean Energy and Setting of OTEC
Plants
6. Tidal and Wave Energy and Mini Hydel Power Plant,Need and Principles of Direct Energy
Conversion
7. Concepts of Thermo-Electric Generators and MHD Generators

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 152


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
Statistics on conventional energy sources and supply in developing countries, Definition-Concepts
ofNCES, Limitations of RES, Criteria for assessing the potential ofNCES. Classification of NCES-
Solar, Wind, Geothermal, Bio-mass, Ocean Energy Sources, comparison of these energy sources.

UNIT-II

Solar Energy-Energy available form Sun, Solar radiation data, Solar energy conversion into heat, Flat
plate and Concentrating collectors, Mathematical analysis of Flat plate collectors and collector
efficiency, Principle of Natural and Forced convection, Solar engines-Stirling, Brayton engines,
Photovoltaic, p-n junction, solar cells, PV systems, Stand-alone, Grid connected solar power satellite.

UNIT-III
Wind energy conversion, General formula -Lift and Drag- Basis of wind energy conversion -Effect of
density, frequency variances, angle of attack, and wind speed. Windmill rotors- Horizontal axis and
vertical axis rotors. Determination of torque coefficient, Induction type generators- working principle.

UNIT-IV
Nature of Geothermal sources, Definition and classification of resources, Utilization for electric
generation and direct heating, Well Head power generating units, Basic features- Atmospheric
exhaust and condensing, exhaust types of conventional steam turbines.
Pyrolysis of Biomass to produce solid, liquid and gaseous fuels, Biomass gasification, Constructional
details of gasifier, usage of biogas for chulhas, various types of chulhas for rural energy needs.

UNIT-V
Wave, Tidal and OTEC energy- Difference between tidal and wave power generation, Principles of
tidal and wave power generation, OTEC power plants, Operational of small cycle experimental facility,
Design of 5 Mw OTEC pro-commercial plant, Economics of OTEC, Environmental impacts of OTEC.
Status of multiple product OTEC systems.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Ashok V Desai, Non-Conventional Energy, Wiley Eastern Ltd, New Delhi, 2003
2.Mittal K M, Non-Conventional Energy Systems, Wheeler Publishing Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Ramesh R & Kumar K U, Renewable Energy Technologies, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi,
2004
2.Wakil MM, Power Plant Technology, Mc Graw Hill Book Co, New Delhi,
2004. 3. Non - Conventional Energy Sources. Rai

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 153


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ASPECTS OF HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER

(OPEN ELECTIVE – III)


IV B. Tech. - I Semester L TPC
Course Code : A2ME48 3 - - 3

Course Overview
This course will emphasize the modes of heat and mass transport in energy engineering systems.
Students will know, understand, and solve heat transfer problems that involve conduction, convection,
and radiation. The course will provide an integrated treatment of heat, mass and momentum transfer
by convection and mass transfer by diffusion. Students will also learn and use software that will
enable them to solve problems that involve exploratory, what-if, and parameter sensitivity
considerations. The course will also assist students to understand the design and operation of
different types of heat exchangers. This course also enables students to identify and describe the
energy transformations in energy systems. The examples of the processes we would be applying
energy conservation principles to include power plant, geothermal energy systems, and industrial
reactors and combustors. This is an essential and required thermal science course in the BS in
Mechanical engineering degree program.

Course Objectives
I. To introduce a basic study of the phenomena of heat and mass transfer.
II. To develop methodologies for solving a wide variety of practical engineering problems.
III. To provide useful information concerning the performance and design of particular systems
and processes. To provide knowledge-based design problem requiring the formulations of
solid conduction and fluid convection and the technique of numerical computation
progressively elucidated in different chapters will be assigned and studied in detail.
IV. To gain experience in designing experiments for thermal systems, the design, fabrication, and
experimentation of a thin film heat flux gage will be attempted as part of laboratory
requirements

Course Outcomes

1. Students are able to model the given heat transfer problem mathematically, categorize the
heat transfer problems
2. Students are able to derive the equation for temperature distribution in fins, to estimate the
rate of heat transfer through conduction through slabs, cylindrical and spherical surface
objects.
3. Students are capable to design the thickness of insulation based on the requirement of heat
transfer
4. Students are able to estimate the rate of heat transfer heat transfer coefficients for forced and
free convection Heat transfer problems
5. Students are able to perform the LMTD & NTU analysis to the heat exchanger problems, to
analyze and design the boiling heat transfer problems.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 154


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
CONDUCTION -Basic Concepts – Mechanism of Heat Transfer – Conduction, Convection and
Radiation
Fourier Law of Conduction - General Differential equation of Heat Conduction Cartesian and
Cylindrical Coordinates – One Dimensional Steady State HeatConduction – Conduction through
Plane Wall, Cylinders and Spherical systems Composite Systems – Conduction with Internal Heat
Generation – Extended SurfacesUnsteady Heat Conduction – Lumped Analysis –UseofHeislersChart.
UNIT- II
CONVECTION -Basic Concepts –Heat Transfer Coefficients – Boundary Layer Concept – Types of
Convection – Forced Convection – Dimensional Analysis – External Flow – Flow over Plates,
Cylinders and Spheres – Internal Flow – Laminar and Turbulent Flow –Combined Laminar and
Turbulent – Flow over Bank of tubes – Free Convection –Dimensional Analysis – Flow over
Vertical Plate, Horizontal Plate, Inclined Plate, Cylinders and Spheres.
UNIT-III
HEAT EXCHANGERS-Nusselts theory of condensation-pool boiling, flow boiling, correlations in boiling
and condensation. Types of Heat Exchangers – Heat Exchanger Analysis – LMTD Method and NTU -
Effectiveness – Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient – Fouling Factors.

UNIT- IV
RADIATION
Basic Concepts, Laws of Radiation – Stefan Boltzman Law, Kirchoffs Law –Black Body Radiation –
Grey body radiation -Shape Factor Algebra – Electrical Analogy – Radiation Shields –Introduction to
Gas Radiation

UNIT- V
MASS TRANSFER
Basic Concepts – Diffusion Mass Transfer – Fick‘s Law of Diffusion – Steady state Molecular Diffusion –
Convective Mass Transfer – Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer Analogy – Convective Mass Transfer
Correlations

TEXT BOOKS

1. Sachdeva R C, ―Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer‖ New Age International, 1995.
2. Frank P. Incropera and David P. DeWitt, ―Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer‖,John Wiley and
Sons, 1998.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Yadav R ―Heat and Mass Transfer‖ Central Publishing House, 1995.
2. Ozisik M.N, ―Heat Transfer‖, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1994.
3. Nag P.K, ― Heat Transfer‖, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2002

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 155


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES

PE-I PE-II
A2ME37 Operations Research A2ME49 Production Planning & Control
A2ME57 Power Plant Engineering A2ME50 Refrigeration & Air-conditioning
A2ME39 Mechatronics A2ME51 Renewable Energy Sources

A2ME40 Product Lifecycle Management A2ME52 Unconventional Machining Processes

PE-III PE-IV

Automation in Manufacturing
A2ME58 Industrial Robotics A2ME62

Quality Management & Quality Flexible Manufacturing Systems


A2ME59 A2ME63
Systems

A2ME60 Mechanical Vibrations A2ME64 Nano Technology

A2ME61 Machine Tool Design A2ME65 Additive Manufacturing

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 156


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

OPERATIONS RESEARCH
(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I)

III B. Tech. - II Semester L TP C


Course Code: A2ME37 3 1- 3

Course Overview
Operation Research facilitates the comparison of every possible alternatives (courses of action or
acts) to know the potential outcomes, permits examination of the sensitivity of the solution to
changes or errors in numerical values, and encourage rational decision-making based on the best
available approaches or techniques.

Course Objectives
The objectives of the course are to enable the student;
I. Explain optimum utilization of resources, effort and implement the decision effectively.
II. Understand scientific systematic approach involved and provide a good intellectual support
for decision making.
III. Discuss substantial experience in taking timely management decisions and for corrective
measures.
IV. Analyzing the behavior of the system for the purpose of improving its performance.
V. Demonstrate reliability of solution obtained from a model depends on the validity of the
model in representing the real systems.
VI. 6.Generate solutions for the problems, what method should be adopted so that the total cost is
minimum or total profit maximum.

Course Outcomes
After completing this course the student must demonstrate the knowledge and ability to:
1. Applying a different linear programming problem technique which has a broad
experience in finding the optimum profit.
2. Apply the knowledge of the course in solving real life problems.
3. Identify areas for research-oriented work based on the course content.
4. Calculate the knowledge that tries to optimize total return by maximizing the
profit and minimizing the cost or loss.
5. Recognize the best (optimum) decisions relative to largest possible portion of
the total organization.
6. Discuss towards the development of better working procedure and systematic approach
in problem analysis, modeling and implementation of solutions at the workplace.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 157


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I

INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH: Basics definition, scope, objectives, phases,


models and limitations ofOperations Research. Linear Programming Problem, Formulation and
Graphical solution of Linear Programming Problem. Simplex Method, Artificial variables Techniques,
big -M method, two -phase simplex method, degeneracy and unbound solutions.

UNIT - II

TRANSPORTATION PROBLEM: Formulation, solution, unbalanced Transportation problem. Finding


basic feasiblesolutions, North-West corner rule, least cost method and Vogel‘s approximation method.
Optimality test - MODI method.
ASSIGNMENT MODEL: Formulation, Hungarian method for optimal solution, solving unbalanced
problem, Travelingsalesman problem as assignment problem.

UNIT - III
SEQUENCING MODELS: Solution of Sequencing Problem, Processing n Jobs through two
machines, Processing n Jobsthrough three machines, Processing two Jobs through m machines,
Processing n Jobs through m Machines.
QUEUING THEORY: Introduction, Single Channel, Poisson arrivals, exponential service times with
infinite populationand finite population models.

UNIT - IV
REPLACEMENT MODELS: Replacement of Items that Deteriorate whose maintenance costs
increase with timewithout change in the money value, Replacement of items that fail suddenly,
individual replacement policy, group replacement policy.

INVENTORY MODELS: Inventory costs, Models with deterministic demand model: (a) Demand rate
uniform andproduction rate infinite, (b) Demand rate non-uniform and production rate infinite, (c)
Demand rate uniform and production rate finite.

UNIT - V
GAME THEORY: Competitive game, rectangular game, saddle point, minimax (maximin) method of
optimal strategies,value of the game. Solution of games with saddle points, dominance principle,
Rectangular games without saddle point, mixed strategy for 2 X 2 games.
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Characteristics of dynamic programming, Dynamic programming
approach for prioritymanagement employment smoothening, Capital budgeting, Stage
Coach/Shortest Path, cargo loading and Reliability problems.

TEXT BOOKS
1. A. M. Natarajan, P. Balasubramani, A. Tamilarasi (2006), Operations Research, Pearson
Education, India.
2. S. D. Shama (2009), Operation Research, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS
rd
1. J. K. Sharma (2007), Operations Research – Theory and Applications, 3 edition, Macmillan
India Ltd, India.
nd
2. R. Panneerselvam (2008), Operations Research, 2 edition, Prentice Hall of India, India.
th
3. F. S. Hillier, G. J. Lieberman (2007), Introduction to Operations Research, 8 edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, India.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 158


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

POWER PLANT ENGINEERING


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I)

III B. Tech. – II Semester L T P C


Course Code: A2ME57 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
This course is concerned with the types, construction, working principles and performance of different
types of conventional and non-conventional power plants. The design, construction, operation and
performance of various components of steam, gas and diesel power plant e.g condensers, cooling
towers, fuel and air handling systems, steam generators, superheaters, intercoolers, reheaters and
regenerators, It also discusses the basics of nuclear energy and operation of nuclear power plants.
The course also covers basics of plant economics and the impact of power plants on the environment.

Course Objectives

I. Describe sources of energy and types of power plants


II. Analyze different types of steam cycles and estimate efficiencies in a steam power plant
III. Describe basic working principles of gas turbine and diesel engine power plants. Define the
performance characteristics and components of such power plants
IV. List the principal components and types of nuclear reactors.
V. Evaluate cycle efficiency and performance of a gas cooled reactor power plant
VI. Classify different types of coupled vapor cycles and list the advantages of combined cycles
power plant
VII. List different types of fuels used in power plants and estimate their heating values
VIII. List types, principles of operations, components and applications of steam turbines, steam
generators, condensers, feed water and circulating water systems.
IX. Estimate different efficiencies associated with such systems
X. Define terms and factors associated with power plant economics. Calculate present worth
depreciation and cost of different types of power plants. Estimate the cost of

Course Outcomes

The student should be able to:


1. Know the various types of power plants used in Jordan.
2. Knowledge of the various types of conventional and non-conventional power plants.
3. Knowledge of the operation, construction and design of various components of power plants.
4. Calculate the performance parameters of various power plants.
5. Define and calculate the various factors of plant load and economy.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 159


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to the Sources of Energy, Resources and Development of Power in
India.
STEAM POWER PLANT: Plant Layout, Working of different Circuits, types of coals, Properties of
coal, Fuel handling equipments, Ash handling systems.
COMBUSTION PROCESS: overfeed and under feed fuel beds, traveling grate stokers, spreader
stokers, retort stokers, pulverized fuel burning system and its components, draught system, cyclone
furnace, Dust collectors, cooling towers and heat rejection. Feed water treatment.

UNIT - II
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE PLANT: Diesel Power Plant: Introduction, IC Engines, types,
construction, Plant layout with auxiliaries, fuel supply system, air starting equipment, lubrication and
cooling system, super charging.
GAS TURBINE PLANT: Introduction, classification, construction Layout with auxiliaries, Principles of
working of closed and open cycle gas turbines. Combined Cycle Power Plants and comparision.

UNIT - III
HYDRO ELECTRIC POWER PLANT: Water power, Hydrological cycle/ flow measurement, drainage
area characteristics, Hydrographs, storage and Pondage, classification of dams and spill ways.
HYDRO PROJECTS AND PLANT: Classification, Typical layouts, plant auxiliaries, plant operation
pumped storage plants.

UNIT - IV
POWER FROM NON-CONVENTIONAL SOURCES: Utilization of Solar, Collectors, Principle of
Working, Wind Energy, types, HAWT, VAWT, Tidal Energy.
NUCLEAR POWER STATION: Nuclear fuel, breeding and fertile materials, Nuclear reactor, reactor
operation.
TYPES OF REACTORS: Pressurized water reactor, Boiling water reactor, sodium-graphite reactor,
fast Breeder Reactor, Homogeneous Reactor, Gas cooled Reactor, Radiation hazards and shielding -
radioactive waste disposal.

UNIT - V
DIRECT ENERGY CONVERSION: Solar energy, Fuel cells, Thermo electric and Thermo ionic, MHD
generation.
POWER PLANT ECONOMICS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS: Capital cost,
investment of fixed charges, operating costs, general arrangement of power distribution, Load curves,
load durationcurve. Definitions of connected load, Maximum demand, demand factor, average load,
load factor, diversity factor - related exercises. Effluents from power plants and Impact on
environment, pollutants and pollution standards, Methods of Pollution control.

TEXT BOOKS
th
1. Rajput (2011), A Text Book of Power Plant Engineering, 4 edition, Laxmi Publications, New
Delhi, India.
st
2. C. Elanchezhian, L. Saravana Kumar, B. Vijaya Ramkanth (2007), Power plant Engineering, 1
edition, I.K International Publishing House, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS
th
1. Arora and S. Domkundwar (2008), A Course in Power Plant Engineering, 5 edition, Dhanpat
Rai & Co. Delhi.
rd
2. P. K. Nag (2008), Power Plant Engineering, 3 edition, Tata McGraw- Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., New Delhi.
rd
3. G.D. Rai (2009), An Introduction to Power Plant Technology, 3 edition, Khanna Publications,
New Delhi.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 160


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MECHATRONICS
(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I)
III B. Tech. – II Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME39 3- - 3

Course Overview

Introduction - multidisciplinary scenario - evolution of mechatronics, Mechatronic elements - data


presentation systems, Controls in NC Machines and fluidic control Controls in NC Machines-hydraulic
systems - direct current motors - stepping motors - feedback devices-encoders - resolvers -
inductosyn – tacho generators.
Course Objectives
I. To impart knowledge on the fundamentals of the following
II. Control systems
III. Controls in NC machine
IV. Fluidic Controls and
V. Process control Pneumatics.

Course Outcomes

1. The students will become familiar with the different aspects of mechatronic engineering.

2. They will have working knowledge to handle problems involving mechatronic and control
elements.
SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION - multidisciplinary scenario - evolution of mechatronics - scope of Mechatronics
- measurement systems - control systems - servomechanisms and regulators - control system
fundamentals - block diagrams and block diagram reduction.

UNIT - II
Mechartonic elements - data presentation systems - displays - analog and digital indicators -
analogous chart recorders - visual display units - CRO - printers - magnetic recorders – light
indicators - liquid crystal display units - alarm indicators data loggers - computers with plug in boards-
data acquisition systems. Process control pneumatics - signals and standards - the flapper nozzle -
volume booster – air relay and force Balance.

UNIT - III
pneumatic controllers - proportional pneumatic control - proportional plus integral pneumatic control -
proportional plus integral plus derivative pneumatic control - PI and IP convertors.

UNIT – IV
Controls in NC Machines and fluidic control Controls in NC Machines-hydraulic systems - direct
current motors - stepping motors - feedback devices-encoders - resolvers - inductosyn – tacho
generators - principles of fluid logic control -Coanda effect

UNIT - V
Basic fluidic devices - fluidic logic gates - bistable – flip flop - OR and NOR gates - exclusive OR
gates - fluidic sensors – backpressure sensor - cone jet proximity sensor -interruptible jet senor.

TEXT BOOKS
1W Boltson , „Mechatronics, Pearson Education third edition 2007. ‟
2.Anthony Esposito, „Fluid Power with applications, 6/E‘, Pearson Education, 2009

REFERENCE BOOKS
1.MahalikNitaigour, Premehand, „Mechatronics, TataMc.Graw Hill Publishers, New Delhi 2005.
‟ 2.Ogata Katsuhiko , „Modern Control Engineering, Printice Hall of India , 2005. ‟
3.YoranKoren, „Computer control of Manufacturing Systems, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New
‟ Delhi, 2005.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 161


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I)
III B. Tech. - II Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME40 31 - 3

Course Overview

Course Objectives

I.Understanding of PLM concepts, particularly product data management, change management,


workflows and configurations
II.Understanding of product lifecycle management (PLM), which represents an all-encompassing
vision for managing data relating to the design, production, support and ultimate disposal of
manufactured goods.
III.Develop and operate within a hazard and risk framework appropriate to engineering activities
IV.Student will develop an enhanced knowledge of the challenges of engineering product
management and how to incorporate the creativity of design and market trends into
engineering product ranges and portfolios that will eventuate into commercial success.
V.This course also aims to inspire sustainable thinking across the entire product lifecycle. You will
be equipped with the knowledge and capabilities to design and operate processes with minimal
impact on the environment.

Course Outcomes

I.Students are able to list, justify and interpret productivity models in Manufacturing and
service organization.
II.Judge product development and industrial process design.
III.Predict facility location and network models.
IV.Interpret and solve data from aggregate output planning models. Knowledge of human
Factors in engineering and various jobs designs.
V.Select and analyze an inventory control model based upon given data. Understanding of
Manufacturing resource and just-in-time planning.
VI.Predict and control the quality of an end product.
VII.Design and model industrial systems using linear and non-linear programming approaches

SYLLABUS
UNIT-I

Introduction to Product Life Cycle Management (PLM): definition, PLM Lifecycle model, Threads
of PLM, Need for PLM, Opportunities and benefits of PLM, Views, Components and Phases of PLM,
PLM feasibility study, PLM visioning.

UNIT-II

PLM Concepts, Processes and Workflow: Characteristics of PLM, Environment driving PLM,PLM
Elements, Drivers of PLM, Conceptualization, Design, Development, Validation, Production, Support
of PLM.

UNIT-III

Product Data Management (PDM) Process and Workflow : PDM systems and importance, reason
for implementing a PDM system, financial justification of PDM implementation. Versioning, check-in

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 162


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

and checkout, views, Metadata, Lifecycle, and workflow. Applied problems and solution on PDM
processes and workflow.

UNIT-IV

Collaborative Product Development : Engineering vaulting, product reuse, smart parts, engineering
change management, Bill of materials and process consistency, Digital mock-up and prototype
development, design for environment, virtual testing and validation, marketing collateral.

UNIT-V

Product Modelling : Product Modeling - Definition of concepts - Fundamental issues - Role of


Process chains and product models -Types of product models - model standardization efforts-types of
process chains - Industrial demands.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Grieves, Michael. Product Lifecycle Management, McGraw-Hill, 2006. ISBN 0071452303


2. Saaksvuori Antti / Immonen Anselmie, product Life Cycle Management
Springer,Dreamtech,3-540-25731-4

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Stark, John. Product Lifecycle Management: Paradigm for 21st Century Product Realisation,
Springer-Verlag, 2004. ISBN 1852338105

2. Fabio Giudice, Guido La Rosa, Product Design for the environment-A life cycle approach,
Taylor & Francis 2006

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 163


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PRODUCTION PLANNING & CONTROL


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II)

IV B. Tech. – I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME49 3 - - 3

Course overview
Surveys the design, development, implementation and management of production planning systems,
including master production scheduling, aggregate planning, material requirements planning, capacity
and inventory planning and production activity control. Students will be exposed to contemporary
approaches such as just-intime, theory of constraints and the relationship of enterprise-level planning
and control systems to the overall materials flow. You will receive 3 units of credit if you successfully
complete this class. This means that you can expect to spend 2 hours 40 minutes in class and/or
online in class each week plus an additional 8-12 hours each week completing homework and
preparing for the next class. You can expect to spend more time studying some weeks and less time
other weeks, but overall you should expect to average between 11 and 15 hours each week on this
class for the entire term.
Course Objectives

Students should be able to articulate and apply the following tools and practices of production
planning and inventory control:
The elements, processes, and technologies comprising the field of Manufacturing Planning and
Control (MPC

I. Demand management theories and techniques – forecasting, CPFR


II. Sales and Operations Planning process in the firm
III. Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) – How MPS decisions are supported by ERP
IV. Supply chain inventory management – independent demand items
V. Using a Material Requirement Planning system
VI. Distribution Requirements Planning in the Supply Chain – Using DRP technologies
VII. Inventory flow and planning models – JIT, MRP, etc.
VIII. Capacity planning and utilization in the MPC
IX. Production Activity Control Techniques – Theory of Constraints (TOC)
X. Implementation issues in MPC systems – supply chain optimization, integration,
transformation, and benchmarking

SYLLABUS
UNIT – I

Introduction: Definition – Objectives and functions of production planning and control – Elements of
production control – Types of production – Organization of production planning and control
department – Internal organization of department.
Forecasting – Importance of forecasting – Types of forecasting, their uses – General principles of
forecasting – Forecasting techniques – qualitative methods and quantitive methods.

UNIT – II
Inventory management – Functions of inventories – relevant inventory costs – ABC analysis – VED
analysis – EOQ model – Inventory control systems – P–Systems and Q-Systems –Introduction to
MRP I, MRP II, ERP, LOB (Line of Balance), JIT and KANBAN system.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 164


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT – III
Routing – definition – routing procedure –route sheets – bill of material – factors affecting routing
procedure, schedule –definition – difference with loading

UNIT – IV
Scheduling policies – techniques, standard scheduling methods.
Line Balancing, aggregate planning, chase planning, expediting, controlling aspects.

UNIT – V
Dispatching – Activities of dispatcher – dispatching procedure – follow up – definition – Reason for
existence of functions – types of follow up, applications of computer in production planning and
control.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Elements of Production Planning and Control / Samuel Eilon.


2. Manufacturing, Planning and Control, Partik Jonsson Stig-Arne Mattsson, TataMcGrawHill

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Inventory Control Theory and Practice / Martin K. Starr and David W. Miller.
2. Production Planning and Control, Mukhopadyay, PHI.
3. Production Control A Quantitative Approach / John E. Biegel. Production Control / Moore.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 165


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II)
IV B. Tech. - I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME50 31 - 3

Course Overview

Refrigeration and air conditioning continues to grow in importance in every segment of our day-to-day
living. The course covers various conventional refrigeration systems like air, vapour compression,
vapour absorption and steam jet refrigeration systems, also describes some unconventional
refrigeration systems; thermoelectric refrigeration, Hilsch tube, etc.. The course introduces the
psychometry, various air conditioning systems and heat pump circuits.

Course Objectives
The objectives of the course are to enable the student;

I. To understand how thermodynamic principles are applied within the refrigeration and
air conditioning.
II. To understand how different components of refrigerator and air conditioner work and to
familiarize with refrigerants.
III. To understand vapour compression and vapour absorption refrigeration system operation.
IV. To analyze the refrigeration cycles and methods for improving the performance
V.To cover basic psychometric processes and to calculate the cooling load for different applications

Course Outcomes

1. Able to analyze air refrigeration and steam jet refrigeration cycles.


2. Able to apply the principles of psychrometry and to perform load calculations.
3. An ability to derive chemical formulae for refrigerants; identify, formulate and solve problems on
vapour compression and vapour absorption refrigeration systems.
4. An ability to design a component to meet desired need of refrigeration.
5. Ability to demonstrate various heat pump circuits.

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I

INTRODUCTION OF REFRIGERATION: Necessity and applications – Unit of refrigeration and C.O.P


– Mechanical Refrigeration – Types of ideal cycles of refrigeration.
AIR REFRIGERATION: Bell Coleman cycle and Brayton cycle, Open and Dense air systems – Actual
air refrigeration system problems – Refrigeration needs of Air crafts.

UNIT – II

VAPOR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION: Working principle and essential components of the


plant – simple vapor compression refrigeration cycle – COP – Representation of cycle on T -S and p-h
charts – effect of sub cooling and super heating – cycle analysis – Actual cycle influence of various
parameters on system performance – use of p-h charts – numerical problems.
PRINCIPLES OF EVAPORATORS: Classification – working Principles Expansion devices – Types –
working principles
REFRIGERANTS: Desirable properties – classification refrigerants used – Nomenclature - Ozone
Depletion – Global warming.

UNIT – III
VAPOR ABSORPTION SYSTEM: Calculation of max COP – description and working of NH3 – water
system and Li Br – water (Two shell & four shell) system. Principle of operation Three Fluid absorption
system, salient features.
STEAM JET REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Working Principle and Basic Components, Principle and
operation of i) Thermoelectric refrigerator, ii) Vortex tube or Hilsch tube.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 166


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT – IV
INTRODUCTION TO AIR CONDITIONING: Psychometric Properties & Processes – Characterization
of Sensible and latent heat loads – Need for Ventilation, Consideration of infiltration – Load concepts
of RSHF, GSHF – Problems, Concept of ESHF and ADP.

UNIT – V
REQUIREMENTS OF HUMAN COMFORT AND CONCEPT OF EFFECTIVE TEMPERATURE –
Comfort chart – Comfort Air conditioning – Requirements of industrial air conditioning, Air conditioning
Load Calculations.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS: Classification of equipment, cooling, heating humidification and
dehumidification, filters, grills and registers, fans and blowers, Heat Pump – Heat sources – different
heatpumpcircuits.

TEXT BOOKS
1. A textbook of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning by R.S. Khurmi & J.K. Gupta / S Chand
Publications
2. A course in Refrigeration and Air Conditioning/ S.C. Arora & Domkundwar. S
/Dhanpatrai Publications

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Refrigeration and Air Conditioning/C.P. Arora/TMH


2.Basic Refrigeration and Air Conditioning/Ananthanarayanan/TMH
3.Refrigeration and Air Conditioning/ P. L. Ballaney.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 167


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II)
IV B. Tech. - I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME51 31 - 3

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 168


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II)
IV B. Tech. – I Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME52 3 - - 3

Course Overview
The objective of this course is to introduce the student to mole advanced topics in the machining
processes. The concept of material removal by an edged tool, involving plastic deformation and
formation of chips, has been known to man for several hundred years.In recent years on increasing
demand for the machining of components of complex shape made hard, difficult - to - machine
materials with exacting tolerances ad surface finish has resulted in the development of a number of
new machining processes.

Course Objectives

I. To teach the modeling technique for machining processes


II. To teach interpretation of data for process selection
III. To teach the mechanics and thermal issues associated with chip formation
IV. To teach the effects of tool geometry on machining force components and surface finish
V. To teach the machining surface finish and material removal rate

Course Outcomes

1. Understand the basic techniques of machining processes modeling


2. Understand the mechanical aspects of orthogonal cutting mechanics
3. Understand the thermal aspects of orthogonal cutting mechanics
4. Ability to extend, through modeling techniques, the single point, multiple point and abrasive
machining processes
5. Estimate the material removal rate and cutting force, in an industrially useful manner, for
practical machining processes.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 169


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION – Need for non-traditional machining methods-Classification of modern machining
processes – considerations in process selection. Materials. Applications.
Ultrasonic machining – Elements of the process, mechanics of metal removal process parameters,
economic considerations, applications and limitations, recent development.

UNIT -II
ABRASIVE JET MACHINING, WATER JET MACHINING AND ABRASIVE WATER JET MACHINE
: Basic principles, equipments, process variables, mechanics of metal removal, MRR, application and
limitations.
ELECTRO – CHEMICAL PROCESSES : Fundamentals of electro chemical machining,
electrochemical grinding, electro chemical honing and deburring process, metal removal rate in ECM,
Tool design, Surface finish and accuracy economic aspects of ECM – Simple problems for estimation
of metal removal rate. Fundamentals of chemical, machining, advantages and applications.

UNIT -III
THERMAL METAL REMOVAL PROCESSES : General Principle and applications of Electric
Discharge Machining, Electric Discharge Grinding and electric discharge wire cutting processes –
Power circuits for EDM, Mechanics of metal removal in EDM, Process parameters, selection of tool
electrode and dielectric fluids, methods surface finish and machining accuracy, characteristics of
spark eroded surface and machine tool selection. Wire EDM, principle, applications.

UNIT – IV
Generation and control of electron beam for machining, theory of electron beam machining,
comparison of thermal and non-thermal processes –General Principle and application of laser beam
machining – thermal features, cutting speed and accuracy of cut.

UNIT-V
Application of plasma for machining, metal removing mechanism, process parameters, accuracy and
surface finish and other applications of plasma in manufacturing industries. Chemical machining -
principle-maskants-applications.
Magnetic abrasive finishing, Abrasive flow finishing, Electro stream drilling, shaped tube electrolyte
machining.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Advanced Machining Processes / VK Jain / Allied publishers
2. Modern MacHining Processes - P. C. Pandey, H. S. Shan

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manufacturing Engineering And Technology By SeropeKalpakjain,Pearson Publications.2001
2. Manufacturing Engineering & Technology, Kalpakjain
3. Unconventional Manufacturing Processes, Singh M.K

INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 170


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – III)


IV B. Tech. – II Semester LT P C

Course Code: A2ME58 3 1 - 3

Course Objectives
The ACFR has three major objectives:
I. Research: To develop both fundamental and applied research programs in field robotics that
encompass the development of new theories and methods in robotics, and the deployment of
these in targeted industrial applications (see Our Research page for more information about
our fundamental and applied research programs):
II. The Fundamental Research Program focuses on enabling technologies in four key areas:
perception, control, learning and systems. These areas draw together common themes and
research priorities from the applied research program (i.e. projects) with the goal of
supporting long-term developments across the whole field robotics area.
III. The Applied Research Program focuses on various application domains: aerospace,
materials handling, indoor robots, mining, defence, subsea, art, transport, agriculture and
others. Each project is tied to on-going industry research projects and benefits from the input
of industrial partners.
IV. Teaching: In concert with the research plan to develop a unique capability for the teaching of
field robotics fundamentals at both undergraduate and postgraduate levels, and to develop a
series of industry-responsive courses in applied field robotics.
V. The Teaching Program is structured around the delivery of industry focused courses in field
robotics technology. These courses are also delivered to incoming PhD students. These
courses are also being developed into a modular industry-focused Master of Engineering
(ME) program. (see Education page for more information)
VI. Working with industry: To build and maintain links with both system developer and end-user
industries, and to develop a range of collaborative strategies for the commercial involvement,
development and exploitation of both fundamental and applied research programs.
VII. The Working with industry (wealth creation) strategy focuses on the establishment of long-
term links with key industry partners, and on the development of field robotics capabilities in
Australian industries. (see Working with industry page for more information)

Course Outcomes
The principle outcome of the ACFR is the establishment of a national capability in field robotics able to
undertake and support substantial end-user applications, able to support the creation of a new
industry in robotics technology, and standing as a leading international research centre in field
robotics.

The management and evaluation strategy for the centre defines specific outcome measures for each
of the three objectives:
1.Research: Through published material, international projects and collaborative project income.
2.Teaching: Through the number, quality and placement of graduates and secondment to industry.
3.Working with industry (wealth creation): Through specific application projects and through the
development or licensing of technology products.

SYLLABUS
UNIT – I
Automation and Robotics, Robot anatomy, configuration of robots, joint notation schemes, work
volume, introduction to manipulator kinematics, position representation, forward and reverse
transformations of a 2- DOF arm, a 3- DOF arm in two dimension , a 4 – DOF arm in three dimension,
homogeneous transformations in robot kinematics, D-H notations, solving kinematics equations,
introduction to robot arm dynamics.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 171


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT – II
Basic control system models, slew motion, joint –interpolated motion and straight line motion,
controllers like on/off, proportional, integral, proportional plus integral, proportional plus derivative,
proportional plus integral plus derivative.

UNIT – III
Robot actuation and feedback components position and velocity sensors, actuators and power
transmission devices, mechanical grippers , vacuum cups, magnetic grippers, pneumatic, electric ,
hydraulic and mechanical methods of power and control signals to end effectors.

UNIT – IV
General considerations in robot material handling, material transfer applications, pick and place
operations, palletizing and related operations, machine loading and unloading, die casting, plastic
molding, forging, machining operations, stamping press operations using robots.

UNIT – V
Use of robot in spot welding continuous are welding, spray coatings, Robots in Assembly Operations.
Robot cell layouts , multiple robots and machine interface, other considerations in work cell design,
work cell control, interlocks, error detection and recovery, work cell controller, robot cycle time
analysis.

TEXT BOOKS
1. M.P. Groover , M. Weiss, R.N. Nagel, N.G. Odrey ―INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS,‖MCGRA – HILL
INTERNATIONAL.
2.Koren ―Robotics‖

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Robotics Engineering, Klaftez Richard D
2. Robotics & Control, Mittal
3. Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Craig John J

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 172


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

QUALITY MANAGEMENT & QUALITY SYSTEMS


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – III)
IV B. Tech. – II Semester LT P C
Course Code: A2ME59 3 1- 3

Course Overview

 To study principles and practices of total quality management;


 To study tools and techniques of total quality management;
 To learn contemporary systems standards for total quality management;
 To improve leadership, problem solving and communication skills dealing with quality
management.

Course Objectives

This course is about managing quality in today‗s competitive environment. It will focus on the issues
that quality manager‗s face and the principles, strategies, methods and tools that might be used to
build an effective quality system. The emphasis in this class will be to discuss, understand and
integrate various concepts of quality. The students will be appraised about the approaches to achieve
customer satisfaction at a competitive price and developing an attitude of doing right things, right at
the first time, every time.

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course students should:


 Be able to use quality management concepts easily.
 Be able to analyse quality features of products and services.
 Know the usage of quality control methods for the analysis and solution of organizations
problems.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 173


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT I
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Introduction to Quality: Origin, growth, Philosophies and Frameworks, Historical
Approaches to Quality, Management Systems that impact the delivery of quality;
Companywide assessment of Quality, Quality Planning, Process Management for controlling
and improving quality, and Quality Systems and Organization for building and sustaining
total quality.
UNIT II
Principles of Quality costs: Concept of Quality cost system, Use of Quality cost, Quality cost
Programmed, Quality cost reduction, Cost of Quality and Return on Quality.
UNIT III
Models for Quality Improvement, Quality Improvement Tools, Problem Solving, Root Cause
Analysis, Cause and Effect analysis, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis, Types of Variation,
Methods of Measurement, Variation in Administrative Applications, Variation in Production
Systems, Variation in Service Systems Quality Systems, An Overview of Supplier Quality
Assurance Systems, Process Capability and Control, Inspection, Testing, Reliability. The Six
Sigma Way.
UNIT IV
Statistical Quality Control, Statistical Process Control, Quality assurance, Process capability
analysis, Software Quality Management, Acceptance sampling, Customer Quality Assurance.

UNIT V
Total Quality Management: Concepts, Implementing TQM Systems, Approaches, Barriers,
Changes in organization culture, Role and responsibilities of management, Continuous
improvement, Quality circles, Quality Function Deployment.
Implementing the ISO series: ISO series as a system, implementing change, Quality
assurance systems and quality audits.
TEXT BOOKS

1. Juran J.M &Frank.M.Gryna, Quality planning and Analysis, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New
York
2. Kaoru Ishikawa, Introduction to Quality Control, Chapman and. Hall, London, 1991.
3. Jack Campanella, ed., Principles of Quality Costs: Principles Implementation and
Use, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2008.
4. James L. Lamprecht, Implementing the ISO series, Marcel &Dekkar int., New York,
1994.
5. Besterfield D H et al., Total Quality Management, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 174


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS
(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE-III)

IV B. Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME60 3 1 - 3

Course Overview

An introductory course in mechanical vibrations where students acquire the ability to (1) formulate
mathematical models of problems in vibrations using Newton's second law or energy principles, (2)
determine a complete solution to mechanical vibration problems using mathematical or numerical
techniques, and (3) determine physical and design interpretations from the results.
Course Objectives

At the end of this course, the student willfully understand and appreciate the importance of vibrations
in mechanical design of machine parts that operate in vibratory conditions, be able to obtain linear
vibratory models of dynamic systems with changing complexities (SDOF, MDOF), be able to write the
differential equation of motion of vibratory systems, be able to make free and forced (harmonic,
periodic, non-periodic) vibration analysis of single and multi degree of freedom linear systems.
Course Outcomes

1. Appreciating the need and importance of vibration analysis in mechanical design of machine parts
that operate in vibratory conditions
2. Ability to analyze the mathematical model of a linear vibratory system to determine its response
3. Ability to obtain linear mathematical models of real life engineering systems
4. Ability to use Lagrange‘s equations for linear and nonlinear vibratory systems

SYLLABUS

UNIT—I

SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS — I: Undamped and damped free vibrations, forced
vibrations coulomb damping; Response to excitation; rotating unbalance and support excitation;
vibration isolation and transmissibility.
SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS — II: Response to Non Periodic Excitations; unit
impulse, unit step and unit Ramp functions; response to arbitrary excitations, The Convolution
integral; shock spectrum; System response by the Laplace Transformation method.
UNIT—II
TWO DEGREE FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Principle modes — undamped and damped free and forced
vibrations; undamped vibration absorbers;

UNIT—III
Multi degree freedom systems: Matrix formulation, stiffness and flexibility influence coefficients;
Eigen value problem, normal modes and their properties Free and forced vibration by Modal analysis;
Method of matrix inversion; Torsion vibrations of multi — rotor systems and geared systems; Discrete
—Time systems.

UNIT-IV
Numerical Methods: Raleigh's stodola's Matrix iteration, Rayeigh - Ritz Method and Holzer's
methods. Continuous system: Free vibration of strings - longitudinal oscillations of bars - Transverse
vibrations of beams -Torsional vibrations of shafts.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 175


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT - V
Critical speeds of shafts: Critical speeds without and with damping, secondary critical speed.

TEXT BOOKS

1.Elements of Vibration Analysis by Meirovitch TMH 2001


2.Mechanical Vibrations By G.K.Groover
REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Mechanical vibrations by S.S.Rao, Pearson


2.Mechanical Vibrations –V.Ram murthy
3.Theory and Practice of Mechanical Vibrations

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 176


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MACHINE TOOL DESIGN


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE –III)

IV B. Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME61 31 - 3

Course Overview
Having knowledge about machine tools industry. Defining optimal and economical machine tools
selection criteria according to machining process. Designing of driving systems and mechanism in
machine tools according to machine tool construction. Choosing proper machine tool and
equipments according to machining quality. Having knowledge about machine tools and their
operation areas.

Course Objectives
I. Develop an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering
II. To develop an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within
realistic constraints.
III. To develop an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems.
IV. To develop an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary
for engineering practice

Course Outcomes
1. Be able to analyze the stress and strain on mechanical components; and understand, identify
and quantify failure modes for mechanical parts
2. Demonstrate knowledge on basic machine elements used in machine design; design
machine elements to withstand the loads and deformations for a given application, while
considering additional specifications.
3. Be able to approach a design problem successfully, taking decisions when there is not a
unique answer.
4. Be proficient in the use of software for analysis and design.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 177


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

UNIT-I
CLASSIFICATION OF MACHINE TOOLS: General purpose, Special purpose, Automatic, Semi-
Automatic machine tools, Transfer lines. Kinematics of Machine Tools: Shaping of geometrical and
real surfaces, Developing and designing of kinematics schemes of machine tools, Kinematic
structures of lathe, drilling, milling, relieving lathe, grinding, gear shaping and gear hobbing machining.
Kinematic design and speed and feed boxes. Productivity loss. Stepped and stepless regulation.

UNIT-II
STRENGTH AND RIGIDITY OF MACHINE TOOL STRUCTURES: Basic principles of design for
strength. Different types of structures. General design procedures. Effect of materials and shape
factors on the rigidity of structure, overall compliance of machine tool. Design of beds, bases columns,
tables, cross rails for various machines. Effect of wear of guide ways on the performance. Various
types of guide ways, their relative advantages. Materials for machine tool components including
plastic guide ways (PTFE).

UNIT-III
ANALYSIS OF SPINDLES, BEARING AND POWER SCREWS: Design of spindles subjected to
combined bending and torsion. Layout of bearings. Pre-loading. Anti-friction slide ways. Rolling
contact, hydrodynamic, hydrostatic, aerostatics and magnetic bearings, their relative performance.
Power Screws, Recirculating ball screws. Hydrodynamic design of journal bearings.

UNIT-IV
MACHINE TOOL VIBRATIONS: Effect of vibration on machine tool; Forced vibrations. Machine tool
chatter. Self excited vibration and dynamic stability single and two degree freedom analysis. Comply
coefficient. Elimination of vibration. Vibration analysis of machine tool structures.

UNIT-V
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS: General principles, hydraulic fluid power lines. Properties of hydraulic fluid.
Various positive displacement pumps, their characteristics and operation. Design of hydraulic tanks
and other systems. Various valves used in hydraulic systems. Design and application of various
hydraulic circuits. One position and multi-position scheme. Single and multi pump screws. Electrical
analogy. Pneumatic circuits. Hydro copying system. Evaluation of machine tools with regard to
accuracies, sound and vibration. Machine tool testing.

TEXT BOOKS
1.Design principle of Metal-cutting Machine Tools-F.Koenigsberger
2.Machine Tool Design-N.K.Mehta-Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Machine Tool Design-Sen and Bhattacharya-CBS Publications
2. Machine Tool Design-S.K.Basu,Oxford and IBH Publishing
3. Acharkan, Machine Tool Design (vol. 1,2 & 3), MIR Publishers, Moscow, 1973.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 178


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

AUTOMATION IN MANUFACTURING
(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – IV)

IV B. Tech. – II Semester L TP C
Course Code: A2ME62 3 1 - 3

Course Overview
Introduction to Automation in Production System, Material handling systems, Automated
manufacturing systems, Control Technologies in Automation, Evaluation of automatic production,
Pneumatic and hydraulic components and circuits and Modeling and Simulation for manufacturing
Plant Automation.

Course Objectives
This course introduces the fundamental concepts and elements Automation in manufacturing
system.course exposes students to various aspects of manufacturing, such as manufacturing
systems, materials management, alternative manufacturing organizations (flexible,open cell concept,
etc.) and various production processes.

Course Outcomes
1) Students will be able to identify the elements of manufacturing automation;
2) Students can identify and understand design process sequence.
3) Students will understand automated material handling and storage.
4) Students will understand robotics systems.
5) Students will understand the principles of quality engineering and the various methods of
automated inspection systems.

UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION:
Automation in Production System, Principles and Strategies of Automation, Basic Elements of an
Automated System, Advanced Automation Functions, Levels of Automations, introduction to
automation productivity.
Material handling systems: Overview of Material Handling Systems- Rotary feeders, oscillating force
feeder, vibratory feeder, elevator type and Centrifugal type feeders, Principles and Design
Consideration, Material Transport systems, storage systems.

UNIT-II
AUTOMATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS:
Components, Classification and Overview of Manufacturing Systems, Manufacturing Cells, GT and
Cellular Manufacturing, FMS, FMS and its Planning and Implementation, Flow lines & Transfer
Mechanisms, Fundamentals and Analysis of Transfer Lines, product design for automatic assembly.

UNIT-III
Control Technologies in Automation:
Industrial Control Systems, Process Industries Verses Discrete-Manufacturing Industries, Continuous
Verses Discrete Control, Computer Process and its Forms. Sensors, Actuators and other control
system components.
Evaluation of automatic production:
product manufacturability, orientation devices- active and passive devices, parts orientation and
Rocapement.
UNIT-IV
Pneumatic and hydraulic components and circuits:
Boolean algebra, pneumatic sensors and amplifiers, jet destruction devices, logic devices, schimit
triggering devices, developing pneumatic circuits for automatic die casting machine.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 179


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT-V
Modeling and Simulation for manufacturing Plant Automation: Introduction, need for system
Modeling, Building Mathematical Model of a manufacturing Plant, Modern Tools- Artificial neural
networks in manufacturing automation, AI in manufacturing, Fuzzy decision and control,robots and
application of robots for automation.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing, M.P. Groover, Pearson
Education.
2. Industrial Automation: W.P.David, John Wiley and Sons

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Handbook of design, manufacturing & Automation : R.C. Dorf, John Wiley and Sons
2. An Introduction to Automated Process Planning Systems, Tiess Chiu Chang & Richard A.
Wysk
3. Manufacturing assembly Handbook:BrunoLotter

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 180


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS


(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – IV)

IV B. Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME63 31 - 3

Course Overview
Introduction to FMS, development and implementation of an FMS, automated material handling
systems, automated storages and programmable controller.

Course Objectives
I. To introduce the concepts of manufacturing systems that can be flexible to the modern
competitive environment.
II. To impart knowledge of Material handling, storage and retrieval systems, Software simulation
and Just in time.
III. To learn the concept and applications of Programmable controllers and programming
methods.

Course Outcomes
On completion of this course, the student will be able to acquire good knowledge of
1. Flexible Manufacturing Systems, Automatic material systems, AS/RS, etc.
2. Programmable controllers and programming methods.

SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION TO FMS: Concepts of FMS – Comparison with conventional manufacturing, types of
flexibility, the advantages and difficulties with FMS, Examples of FMS installations worldwide.
UNIT-II
DEVELOPMENT AND IMPLEMENTATION OF AN FMS: FMS project management planning and
organization, Designing the FMS, Data processing system design.
UNIT-III
AUTOMATED MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS: Function- types- analysis of material handling
equipment‘s. Design of conveyor & AGV systems.
UNIT-IV
AUTOMATED STORAGES: Storage system performance-AS/RS-carousel storage system –WIP
storage system – interfacing handling storage with manufacturing.
PALLETS, FIXTURES, AND MACHINES: Introduction, pallets for prismatic parts, fixtures for prismatic
parts, pallets and fixtures for turned parts.
UNIT-V
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER: Control system architecture – elements of programmable
controller‘s languages, control system flow chart, comparison of programming methods.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Groover M P, ―Automation, production System and Computer Integrated Manufacturing‖,
Prentice Hall India (P) ltd,1989.
2. Ranky PG, ―The Design and Operation of FMS‖, IFS Pub, UK, 1988.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Viswanatham N & Narahari Y, ―Performance Modeling of Automated Manufacturing systems‖,


Prentice Hall India (P) Ltd. 1992.
2. Kusiak A, ―Intelligent manufacture Systems‖, Prentice Hall, Engle wood Clitts, NJ, 1990.
3. ―Flexible manufacturing systems in practice Applications, Design, and Simulation‖
Joseph Talavage & Roger G. Hannnam, Marcel Dekker, INC. New York and Basel

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 181


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

NANOTECHNOLOGY
(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – IV)

IV B. Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME64 31 - 3

Course Overview
This is primarily course which brings together relevant knowledge from the disciplines of physics and
chemistry to give students a fundamental understanding of the integrated multidisciplinary nature of
Nanotechnology. It will also be a forum for discussion on the possible consequences of such
technological development.

Course Objectives
This course is the first of 3 integrated multidisciplinary courses which will bring together discipline
based knowledge and skills and which will show how this expertise can be applied to Nano-
technological problems.

Course Outcomes
On completion of this course,students should be able
to: 1.Understand how basic nanosystems work
2.use physical reasoning to develop simple nanoscale models to interpret the behaviour of such
physical systems.
3.Report their work in a clear and precise way through talks and reports
4.Understand the major issues in producing a sustainable nanotech industry.

SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
General Introduction: Basics of Quantum Mechanics, Harmonic oscillator, magnetic Phenomena,
band structure in solids, Mossbauer and Spectroscopy, optical phenomena bonding in solids,
Anisotropy.

UNIT-II
Silicon Carbide: Application of Silicon carbide, nano materials preparation, Sintering of SiC,
X-ray Diffraction data, electron microscopy sintering of nano particles,
Nano particles of Alumina and Zirconia: Nano materials preparation, Characterization, Wear
materials and nano composites,

UNIT-III
Mechanical properties: Strength of nano crystalline SiC, Preparation for strength
measurements, Mechanical properties, Magnetic properties,
Electrical properties: Switching glasses with nanoparticles,Electronic conduction with nano
particles Optical properties: Optical properties, special properties and the coloured glasses

UNIT-IV
Process of synthesis of nano powders, Electro deposition, Important naon materials
Investigaing and manipulating materials in the nanoscale: Electron microscopics, scanning
probe microscopics, optical microscopics for nano science and technology, X-ray diffraction.

UNIT-V
Nanobiology : Interaction between bimolecules and naoparticle surface, Different types of inorganic
materials used for the synthesis of hybrid nano-bio assemblies, Application of nano in biology,
naoprobes for Analytical Applications-A new Methodology in medical diagnostics and Biotechnology,
Current status of nano Biotechnology, Future perspectives of Nanobiology, Nanosensors.
NanoMedicens : Developing of Nanomedicens Nanosytems in use,Protocols for nanodrug
Administration, Nanotechnology in Diagnostics applications, materials for used in Diagnostics and
Therapeutic applications, Molecular Nanomechanics, Molecular devices, Nanotribology, studying
tribology at nanoscale, Nanotribology applications.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 182


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS

1. Nano Materials- A.K.Bandyopadhyay/ New Age Publishers.


2. Nano Essentials- T.Pradeep/TMH

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Nanotechnology-Basic Science and Emerging Technologies Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangra


Geoff Smith,
Michelle Simons and Burkhard Raguse, Overseas Press.
2. Nanotechnology-AGentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner,
Prentice Hall
3. Nanotechnology: RebeccaLJohnson, Lerner Publications.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 183


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING
(PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – IV)

IV B. Tech. – II Semester L T P C
Course Code: A2ME65 31 - 3

Course Overview
Introduction: Need for the compression in product development, Fusion Decomposition Modeling,
Concepts Modelers, LASER ENGINEERING NET SHAPING, Rapid Manufacturing Process
Optimization.

Course Objectives
The objectives of this course are
I. Develop an understanding of the emerging technologies of rapid prototyping, rapid
manufacturing and rapid tooling.
II. Develop a degree of competency in the evaluation of various rapid manufacturing and rapid
tooling technologies and their application in modern manufacturing processes.
III. To provide knowledge on advances in injection moulding process, and
IV. To develop competency in plastic filling simulation software to improve the performance of
injection moulding .

Course Outcomes
On completion of this course, students will be able to
1. Apply the basic principles of rapid prototyping (RP), rapid tooling (RT), and reverse
engineering (RE) technologies to product development;
2. Decipher the limitations of RP, RT, and RE technologies for product development; realise the
application of RP, RT, and RE technologies for product development.

SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION: Need for the compression in product development, History of RP system, Survey of
applications, Growth of RP industry and classification of RP system.
Stereo Lithography System: Principle, Process parameter, Process details, Data preparation, Data
files and machine details, Applications.

UNIT II
FUSION DECOMPOSITION MODELING : Principle, process parameter, Path generation,
Applications. Solid ground curing: Principle of operation, Machine details, Applications, Laminated
Object Manufacturing: Principle of Operation, LOM materials, Process details, Applications.

UNIT –III
CONCEPTS MODELERS: Principle, Thermal jet printer, Sander ‟ s model market, 3-D printer,
Genisys Xs printer HP system 5, Object Quadra system.

UNIT –IV
LASER ENGINEERING NET SHAPING (LENS) Rapid Tooling: Indirect Rapid tooling- Silicon rubber
tooling- Aluminum filled epoxy tooling Spray metal tooling, Cast kriksite, 3Q keltool, etc, Direct Rapid
Tooling Direct. AIM, Quick cast process, Copper polyamide, Rapid Tool, DMILS, Prometal, Sand
casting tooling, Laminate tooling soft, Tooling vs. hard tooling. Software for RP: STL files, Overview of
Solid view, magics, imics, magic communication, etc. Internet based software, Collaboration tools.

UNIT V
RAPID MANUFACTURING PROCESS OPTIMIZATION: Factors influencing accuracy, Data
preparation error, Part building error, Error in finishing, Influence of build orientation.
Allied Process: Vacuum casting, surface digitizing, Surface generation from point cloud, Surface
modification- Data transfer to solid models.

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 184


MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS

1. ― stereo lithography and other RP & M Technologies‖, Paul F.Jacobs, SME, NY 1996
2. ― Rapid Manufacturing ‖, Flham D.T & Dinjoy S.S, Verlog London 2001

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Terry Wholers, ― Wholers report 2000‖, Wholers Associates,2000.


2. ―Rapid automated‖, Lament wood, Indus Press New York.
3.Rapid prototyping principles and applications,Rafiq Noorani

MLR Institute of Technology- UG-Autonomous-Regulations–MLR-16 Page 185

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi